Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

own+means

  • 1 τέλος

    τέλος, εος, τό, ([etym.] τέλλομαι, τέλλω)
    A coming to pass, performance, consummation,

    εἰ γὰρ ἐπ' ἀρῇσιν τ. ἡμετέρῃσι γένοιτο Od.17.496

    ;

    ἐν [θεοῖς] τ. ἐστὶν ὁμῶς ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669

    ; δίκη δ' ὑπὲρ ὕβριος ἴσχει ἐς τ. ἐξελθοῦσα issuing in fulfilment, execution, ib. 218;

    καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης κατὰ νόμον τ. ἐχούσης PEleph.1.12

     (iv B.C.), cf. IG12(7).67.48 (Arcesine, iv/iii B.C.);

    καθήκει νῦν [τὰν γνώμαν] ἐπὶ τέλος ἀχθῆμεν SIG793.7

     (Halasarna, i A.D.); ἔλπομαι μέν, ἐν θεῷ γε μὰν τ. Pi.O.13.105, cf. N.8.45, 10.29, D.18.193;

    ἢν θεὸς ἀγαθὸν τ. διδῷ αὐτῷ X.Cyr.3.2.29

    ;

    ἐν πείρᾳ τ. διαφαίνεται Pi.N.3.70

    ;

    ψευστήσεις, οὐδ' αὖτε τ. μύθῳ ἐπιθήσεις Il.19.107

    , cf. Isoc.5.71, 6.77; result,

    τ. δ' οὔ πώ τι πέφανται Il.2.122

    ;

    εἵως κε τ. πολέμοιο κιχείω 3.291

    ;

    ἐν γὰρ χερσὶ τ. πολέμου 16.630

    ; ἶσον τείνειεν πολέμου τ. 20. 101, cf. Hes.Th. 638 (but ἢ πολέμοιο ἢ λοιμοῖο τ. ποτιδέγμενοι the coming to pass (outbreak) of.., A.R.4.1282); τί μὰν ἀφήσει τ.; S. OC 1468 (lyr.); τί ἔσται τὸ τ. τῶν γιγνομένων τούτων ἐμοί; Hdt.1.155, cf. Isoc.6.50; ἀποίητον.. θέμεν ἔργων τ. undo things done, Pi.O.2.17; ὁδοῦ τ. S.OC 1400; φόνου τ. A.R.1.834;

    τοῦ δ' ὔμμι τέλος κρηῆναι ἔοικεν Id.3.172

    ; τῷ τ. πίστιν φέρων the outcome, S.El. 735; Ζεὺς πάντων ἐφορᾷ τ. Sol.13.17;

    ἀκόλουθον τὸ τ. ἐξέβη τοῦ κινδύνου ταῖς ἐπιβολαῖς Plb.4.11.9

    ;

    ἀμφίδοξα τὰ τ. τῶν κινδύνων αὐτοῖς ἀπέβαινε Id.18.28.11

    , cf. 18.32.12, 3.5.7;

    τ. τοιόνδε ἐγένετο τῆς μάχης Hdt. 9.22

    , cf. Plb.1.61.2; μάχης.. κεκύρωται τ. A.Ch. 874; διὰ μάχης ἥξω τέλους, = διὰ μάχης ἥξω, Id.Supp. 475; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα μαχᾶν τάμνειν τ. to seek to determine the issue of the battles in both directions, Pi.O.13.57; more generally, event,

    οὐ γὰρ ἔγωγέ τί φημι τ. χαριέστερον εἶναι ἢ ὅτε.. Od.9.5

    : in concrete sense, result, product,

    τ. εὐπεψίας αἱματικῆς πιμελὴ καὶ στέαρ Arist.PA 672a4

    , cf. GA 725b8.
    2 in contexts like Hes.Op. 669, Il.16.630 (v. supr.), τ. can be understood as power of deciding, supreme power, and so we have

    τ. μὲν Ζεὺς ἔχει.. πάντων ὅσ' ἐστί Semon.1.1

    ;

    ἐν δ' ἐμοὶ τ. αὐτοῖν γένοιτο τῆσδε τῆς μάχης πέρι S.OC 423

    ; [

    Ἄπολλον].. ὅθεν πολεμόκραντον ἁγνὸν, τ. ἐν μάχᾳ A.Th. 162

     (lyr.);

    τελέων τελειότατον κράτος, ὄλβιε Ζεῦ Id.Supp. 525

     (lyr.);

    τ. ἔχει δαίμων βροτοῖς, τ. ὅπᾳ θέλει E.Or. 1545

     (lyr.);

    τ. δ' ἐφ' ἡμῖν, εἴτε.. εἴτε.. Id.Hel. 887

    ; καὶ τοῖσ' (sc. ἰητροῖς) οὐδὲν ἔπεστι τ. they have no power or efficacy, Sol.13.58: and in the civil sphere, τ. ἔχειν, of persons, to have the power to ratify, IG12.57.25, Foed. ap. Th.4.118, Arist.Pol. 1322b13; ὅ τι ἂν δόξῃ τοῖς πλείοσι τοῦτ' εἶναι τ. the decision of the majority must be final, ib. 1317b6; κύριος ἔστω ἐπιβάλλειν κατὰ τὸ τ. shall have authority to inflict a fine up to the limit of his powers, Lexap.D.43.75;

    κατὰ τὸ τ. ζημιοῦσθαι Is.4.11

    ; τοῖς κατ' ἐμπορίαν παραγιγνομένοις μηδὲν ἔστω τ. πλὴν ἐπὶ κήρυκι ἢ γραμματεῖ Foed. ap. Plb.3.22.8; τ. ἔχειν, of things, to have decisive or final authority,

    σφῷν μὲν ἐντολὴ Διὸς ἔχει τ. δή A.Pr. 13

    ; ἡ.. τούτου αἰτίασις οὐκ ἔχει τ. has no validity, Antipho 5.89; πρὶν τ. τι αὐτῶν ἔχειν before any of the terms had validity, i.e. had been ratified, Th.5.41, cf. D.35.27; τοῦ ζῆν καὶ μὴ ζῆν τὸ τ. ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ ἀναπνεῖν the decisive difference between.., Arist.Resp. 480b19.
    3 magistracy, office,

    τ. δωδεκάμηνον Pi.N.11.9

     ( δυω- codd.); οἱ ἐν τ. men in office, magistrates, S.Aj. 1352, Ph. 385, Th.3.36; ἔξω τῶν βασιλέων καὶ τῶν μάλιστα ἐν τ. Id.1.10, cf. 6.88;

    οἱ ἐν τέλεϊ ἐόντες Hdt.3.18

    , 9.106; poet.,

    οἱ ἐν τέλει βεβῶτες S.Ant.67

    ; οἱ τὰ τ. ἔχοντες Foed. ap. Th.5.47;

    ὂρ μέγιστον τ. ἔχοι Schwyzer409.3

     (Elis, V B.C.);

    τοὺς.. τὸ ὁροφυλακικὸν τ. ἔχοντας SIG633.94

     (Milet., ii B.C.); τὸ τ. the government,

    τοιαῦτ' ἔδοξε τῷδε Καδμείων τέλει A.Th. 1030

    ; τὰ τ. the magistrates, Th. (with a masc. part. and pl. (v.l.) verb) 1.58, 4.15, X.An.2.6.4.
    4 decision, doom,

    Ζεὺς.. οἶδε, ὁπποτέρῳ θανάτοιο τ. πεπρωμένον ἐστί Il.3.309

    ;

    Κῆρες δὲ παρεστήκασι.., ἡ μὲν ἔχουσα τ. γήραος ἀργαλέου, ἡ δ' ἑτέρη θανάτοιο Mimn.2.6

    ; μήτηρ.. μέ φησι διχθαδίας Κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλος δέ (or τέλοσδε) Il.9.411, cf. 13.602; ἐξέφυγον θανάτου τ. Archil.6.3;

    τ. θανάτου ἀλεείνων Od.5.326

    ;

    τ. θανάτοιο κάλυψεν Il.5.553

    ;

    οὐδέ κέ μ' ὦκα τ. θανάτοιο κιχείη 9.416

    , cf. 11.451;

    ἡμετέρου θανάτοιο κακὸν τ., οἷον ἐτύχθη Od.24.124

    , cf. A.Th. 906 (lyr.):—judicial decision,

    ἀμμενῶ τ. δίκης Id.Eu. 243

    ; κύριον μένει τ. ib. 544 (lyr.); οὐκ ἔχουσα τῆς δίκης τ. not having authority to decide the case, ib. 729; ἦ κἀπ' ἐμοὶ τρέποιτ' ἂν αἰτίας τ.; will you submit the decision of this case to me? ib. 434;

    τὸ τ. κρίνειν Pl.Lg. 768b

    ; τ. ἐπιθέτω τῇ δίκῃ ib. 767a, cf. 761e, 957b; decision of an assembly, A. Supp. 603, 624; of a king, Id.Ag. 934; ἐξαιτράπης ἐὼν Ἰωνίης, τ. ἐποίησε τὴν γῆν εἶναι Μιλησίων prob. in SIG134b30 (Milet., iv B.C.); ὥς τοι ἐγὼ μύθου τ. ἐν φρεσὶ θείω the summing up or crux of the matter, Il.16.83.
    5 something done or ordered to be done, task, service, duty, γνῶ.. ὅ οἱ οὔ τι τ. κατὰ καίριον ἦλθεν on no fatal errand, Il.11.439 (nisi leg. κατακαίριον)

    ; οὐδὲ μακύνων τ. οὐδέν Pi.P.4.286

    ; ὅσοις τοῦτ' ἐπέσταλται τ. A.Eu. 743, cf. Ag. 908; μ' Ἀπόλλων τῷδ' ἐπέστησεν τέλει ib. 1202, cf. Ch. 760; ἄυπνα ὀμμάτων τέλη the wakeful duties (or services) of the eyes, E.Supp. 1137 (lyr.); ἀμφοτερᾶν τοι χαρίτων.. ζεύξω τ. the rendering of both services, Pi.I.1.6; αἰτουμένῳ μοι κοῦφον εἰ δοίης τ. a small service or favour, A.Th. 260;

    ἡξῶ ναὶ τὸν Πᾶνα κακὸν τ. αὐτίκα δωσῶν Theoc.4.47

    ; obligation to render a service or payment, ὅτε δὴ μισθοῖο τ. πολυγηθέες ὧραι ἐξέφερον the Payment(-day) of the wage, Il.21.450;

    οἱ δ' ἐλάττω τῶν ἱκανῶν κεκτημένοι, τὴν ἀναγκαίαν ἀτέλειαν ἔχοντες, ἔξω τοῦ τ. εἰσὶ τούτου D.20.19

    , cf. Poll.8.156; ἐν τέλει μαθεῖν to be taught for a fee, Id.4.46.
    6 pl., services or offerings due to the gods,

    δαίμοσιν θῦσαι θέλουσα πελανόν, ὧν τέλη τάδε A.Pers. 204

    ;

    ἔνθ' ὁρίζεται βωμοὺς τ. τ' ἔγκαρπα Κηναίῳ Διί S.Tr. 238

    ; ἔλιπον Ζηνὶ τροπαίῳ πάγχαλκα τ. Id.Ant. 143 (anap.);

    γῇ δὲ τῇδε Σισύφου σεμνὴν ἑορτὴν καὶ τέλη προσάψομεν E.Med. 1382

    ;

    θεοῖσι μικρὰ θύοντες τέλη Id.Fr.327.6

    ; of the Eleusinian mysteries, οὗ πότνιαι σεμνὰ τιθηνοῦνται τ. S.OC 1050 (lyr.), cf. Fr. 837;

    σεμνῶν ἐς ὄψιν καὶ τ. μυστηρίων E.Hipp.25

    ; called μεγάλα τ., Pl.R. 560e; rarely in sg., τοῦδε μυστικοῦ τέλους this mystic rite, A.Fr. 387; of the marriage rite,

    τ. γάμοιο Od.20.74

    , cf.A.R.4.1202, AP6.276 (Antip.); γαμήλιον τ. A.Eu. 835; τὰ νυμφικὰ τ. S.Ant. 1241;

    τ. ὁ γάμος ἐκαλεῖτο Poll.3.38

    , cf. Paus.Gr.Fr.306, Sch.Ar.Th. 982, Stob.2.7.3a.
    7 service rendered by a citizen in the Solonian constitution to the state, also his rating according to this service, θητικοῦ ἀντὶ τέλους ἱππάδ' ἀμειψάμενος Epigr. ap. Arist.Ath.7.4; τιμήματι διεῖλεν εἰς τέτταρα τ. four ratings or classes, ib.7.3; later, τὸ τῶν ἱππέων τ., Lat. ordo equester, D.C.48.45, al.
    8 dues exacted by the state, Ar.V. 658 (pl.), Pl.R. 425d (pl.); ἀγορᾶς τ. a market- toll, Ar.Ach. 896; πορνικὸν τ. Aeschin.1.119; τ. πρίασθαι, πωλεῖν, farm a tax or let it, D.24.144, Aeschin. l.c.; ἐκλέγειν. πράττειν, levy it, D.l.c., Alex.263.3, Aeschin.3.113; τελεῖν pay a tax or duty, Pl.Lg. 847b; εἰ τὰ τ. τελεῖ, ποῖον τ. τελεῖ, questions put to candidates at Athens, Din.2.17, Arist.Ath.7.4;

    τέλη κατατίθησιν Antipho 5.77

    ;

    καταβαλεῖν And.1.93

    ; freq. in Inscrr., IG12.46.12, al., SIG135.14 (Olynthus, iv B.C.), al., and Papyri, τὸ ὡρισμένον τῆς αἰτήσεως τ., etc., POxy.1473.30 (iii A.D.), cf. PCair.Zen.240.7 (iii B.C.), etc.: metaph., τέλη λύειν, v. λύω v. 2.
    9 financial means, expenditure, usu. in dat. pl., ὃς ἂν τοῖς ἰδίοις τ. μὴ ἑαυτὸν μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν πόλιν ὠφελῇ by the use of his own means, Th.6.16; κακῶς ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς ποιούντων τέλεσι τοῖς οἰκείοις if we harm ourselves at our own expense, Id.4.60;

    ἀναγραψάτω.. τέλεσι τοῖς Λεωνίδου IG 12.56.22

    , cf. 94.14, al.;

    Χερρόνησον τοῖς αὑτοῦ τ. διορύξει D.6.30

    ;

    δημοσίοις τέλεσι Plu.Phoc.38

    : in nom. sg., μάτην γὰρ οἴκῳ σὸν τόδ' ἐκβαίη τ. E.Fr. 639.
    10 a military station or post with defined duties (cf. signf. 5), ἐλθεῖν εἰς φυλάκων ἱερὸν τ. Il.10.56; αἶψα δ' ἐπὶ Θρῃκῶν ἀνδρῶν τ. ἷξον ἰόντες ib. 470; δόρπον ἔπειθ' ἑλόμεσθα κατὰ στρατὸν ἐν τελέεσσιν at our posts, in the ranks, 11.730, cf. 18.298; later, military unit, division, squadron,

    τέλει ἑνὶ τῶν ἱππέων Th.2.22

    , cf. 4.96;

    πελταστῶν τέλη E.Rh. 311

    ;

    κατὰ τέλεα Hdt.1.103

    , 7.87, al.;

    κατὰ τέλη Th.6.42

    , Plb.11.11.6, cf. 11.15.2, Polyaen.2.1.17; in the Roman army, legion, J.AJ14.16.2, BJ1.17.9, Plu.Ant.18.56, App.BC5.87, al.
    b a force of 2048 infantry, = μεραρχία, Ascl. Tact.2.10, Arr.Tact.10.5, Ael.Tact.9.7.
    c a force of 2048 cavalry, Ascl.Tact.7.11, Arr.Tact.18.4, Ael.Tact.20.2.
    II δίρρυμά τε καὶ τρίρρυμα τέλη troops or columns of.. chariots, A.Pers.47 (anap.); of ships,

    τρία τ. ποιήσαντες τῶν νεῶν Th.1.48

    : also ὀρνίθων τέλεα flocks of birds, v.l. for γένεα, Hdt.2.64;

    τ. ἀθανάτων A.Fr. 151

     (anap.).
    12 a territorial division, Στρατικὸν τ. SIG421.44 (Acarnania, iii B.C.); Κορωνείων τὸ τ. Supp.Epigr.3.354 (Thebes, iii B.C.); τὸ Λοκρικὸν τ. GDI2070 (Delph., ii B.C.).
    II degree of completion or attainment,

    τόσσον μὲν ἔχον τ., οὔατα δ' οὔ πω.. προσέκειτο Il.18.378

    ; degree of maturity, age,

    ἐπὴν δὴ τοῦτο τ. παραμείψεται ὥρης Mimn.2.9

    ;

    ἥβης πρὶν τ. ἄκρον ἰδεῖν Simon.123

    ;

    ἥβης τ. μολόντας E.Med. 920

    ; εἰς ἀνδρὸς τ. ἰέναι man's estate, Pl.Mx. 249a;

    εἰς πρεσβύτου τ. ἀφικομένοις Id.Epin. 992d

    ;

    τὸ τῶν παίδων τ. ἄδηλον οἷ τελευτᾷ κακίας καὶ ἀρετῆς ψυχῆς τε πέρι καὶ σώματος Id.Smp. 181e

    ;

    οὐδὲ γήρως ἔβας τ. σὺν τᾷδε E.Alc. 413

     (lyr.).
    b a length of time (or space), term, course, ἀρετάς, αἷσι Κλεωνυμίδαι θάλλοντες αἰεὶ σὺν θεῷ θνατὸν διέρχονται βιότου τ. Pi.I.4(3).5(23); so perh. in E.Hipp.87 (v. infr. 3), and in διὰ τέλους (v. infr. 2 c).
    2 state of completion or maturity, τ. λαβεῖν, ἔχειν, of plants or animals, to attain maturity, Pl.Phdr. 276b, Lg. 834c, cf. 899e: hence, completion, end, finish, τ. ἐπιθεῖναι τῷ λόγῳ complete it, Id.Smp. 186a, cf. Prt. 348a; ὃ πᾶσι τοῖς προτέροις ἐπ έθηκε τ. as a finish to all his former acts, D.18.140;

    τὸ τ. τῆς σκηνῆς ἐποιήσαντο X.Cyr.2.3.24

    ;

    ταύτης.. τῆς ἡμέρας τοῦτο τὸ τ. ἐγένετο Id.An.1.10.18

    ; τ. λαβεῖν to be completed, Pl.R. 501e, Isoc.4.5;

    τ. ἔχειν Pl.Lg. 772c

    ; οὐ τ. ἵκεο μύθων didst not reach the end of thy speech, Il.9.56;

    ἐπὶ τέλους τοῦ δρόμου Pl.R. 613d

    ;

    μέχρι τοῦ τὸ προκείμενον ἐπὶ τέλος ἀχθῆναι PTeb.14.8

     (ii B.C.);

    ἑκάστων πρὸς τέλος ἀχθέντων UPZ108.29

     (ii B.C.), cf. BGU1816.11 (i B.C.);

    ἡ εἰκοστὴ τοῦ νοσήματος ἡμέρα τ. μὲν τριῶν ἑβδομάδων, ἓξ δὲ τετράδων Gal.18(2).234

    :—freq. in Adverbial phrases:
    a τέλος at last,

    ὥστε τ. ἡσυχίαν ἦγον Th.2.100

    , cf. 5.46; but most freq. at the beginning of the clause,

    μάχης δὲ καρτερῆς γενομένης, τέλος οὐδέτεροι νικήσαντες διέστησαν Hdt.1.76

    , cf.4.131, al.;

    τέλος δέ Id.1.36

    , Thgn. 1294, etc.; ἀλλὰ τ. Hdt.6.137;

    τ. μέντοι Id.5.89

    , X.HG5.4.30;

    τ. γε μέντοι S.Ant. 233

    ; καὶ τ. Hdt.4.154, Th.1.109; τό γε τ. Pl.Lg. 740e.
    b < ἐς τ. in the end, in the long run,

    πάντως ἐς τ. ἐξεφάνη Sol.13.28

    , cf. Hdt.9.37; εἰς τ. S.Ph. 409;

    θνητῶν δ' εἰς τ. ὄλβιος οὐδείς E.IA 161

     (anap.), cf. Hdt.3.40; ὁρῶντες τὴν Λιβύην εἰς τ. ἀβλαβῆ διαμένουσαν altogether, completely, Plb.1.20.7, cf. PTeb.38.11 (ii B.C.), OGI90.12 (Rosetta, ii B.C.), PSI10.1120.5 (i B.C./i A.D.); ἐς τ. ἄνυε μοίρας dub. l. in Theoc.1.93.
    c διὰ τέλους (orig. perh. from signf. 1.1 or 5, or 11.1b, through the (whole) performance or time), through to the end, completely, A.Pr. 275, S.Aj. 685, E.Supp. 270, Isoc.5.24, 8.17, 19.4; throughout, all the time, always, Antipho 5.42, Timocl.8.5, Hegesipp.Com.2.3; so

    διὰ τέλεος Hp.Acut.46

     (= διὰ παντὸς καὶ ἀεί acc. to Gal.15.618);

    διὰ τέλους ἀεί Pl.Phlb. 36e

    ; permanently, for good, τοῦ ἀφεθῆναί σε διὰ τ. PPetr.2p.45 (iii B.C.).
    e τέλει perh. in the end, S.OT 198 (lyr.).
    3 esp. τ. ἔχειν βίου to have reached the end of life, to be dead, Pl.Lg. 801e;

    ἐμοὶ μὲν τοῦ βίου τὸ τ. ἤδη πάρεστιν X.Cyr.8.7.6

    ;

    πᾶσίν ἐστιν ἀνθρώποις τ. τοῦ βίου θάνατος D.57.27

    ;

    εἰς τ. τοῦ ζῆν ἀφικνεῖσθαι S.OC 1530

    : less freq. abs., death,

    ἐλπίς ἐστι νύκτερον τ. μολεῖν A.Th. 367

     (lyr.);

    οἱ νεηνίαι οὐκέτι ἀνέστησαν ἀλλ' ἐν τέλεϊ τούτῳ ἔσχοντο Hdt.1.31

    ; ἔχει τὸ κάλλιστον τ. X.Cyr.7.3.11; ἔχει τ., = τετελεύτηκε, Laconian phrase acc. to Hsch.;

    τῶν ἤδη τ. ἐχόντων Pl.Lg. 717e

    , cf. 772c, BGU1857.7 (i B.C.); reversely,

    τ. ἔχει τινά Pl.Lg. 740c

    ;

    οἷόν σε βίου τ. εἷλε E.Rh. 735

     (anap.):—but ὀλβίως ἔλυσεν τὸ τ. βίου has paid life's toll (cf. supr.1.8), S.OC 1720 (lyr.); τὸ τ. ὁ χρόνος ἀπαιτεῖ Poet. in Mus.Script.p.452 von Jan; also

    τ. δὲ κάμψαιμ' ὥσπερ ἠρξάμην βίου E.Hipp.87

     (cf. supr. 11.1b); πρὶν ἂν πέλας (v.l. τέλος)

    γραμμῆς ἵκηται καὶ τ. κάμψῃ βίου Id.El. 955

    -6.
    4 end, cessation, ὡς δὲ πρὸς τ. γόων ἀφίκοντ' S.OC 1621; πῶς τροχηλάτου μανίας ἂν ἔλθοιμ' ἐς τ. πόνων τ' ἐμῶν; E.IT83; ὅταν δὴ πημάτων λάβῃ τ. Id.Hel. 534;

    τ. δέχει δὴ τῶν ἐμῶν προσφθεγμά των Id.Hec. 413

    ;

    ἡ μὲν οὖν ἐπανάστασις.. τοῦτο τὸ τ. ἔσχεν Hell.Oxy.10.3

    ;

    ἐπειδὴ οὐχ οἷόν τε εἰς ἄπειρον, τ. ἔσται πάσης φορᾶς Arist.Metaph.

     1074a30.
    5 end of a word, A.D.Pron.12.25, al.; of a sentence,

    ἐπὶ τέλει πρόσκειται Sor.1.43

    , cf. Gal.15.20; of a chapter or book,

    ἐπὶ τέλει ἀναλυθήσεται Archim.Sph.Cyl.2.4

    , cf. Gal.15.10;

    πρὸς τῷ τ. ῥηθήσεται Pl.Lg. 957b

    ;

    πρὸς τῷ τ. τοῦ ἐντέρου Arist.PA 675a16

    ; ἀπὸ τέλους τοῦ σταδίου, opp. ἀπὸ μέσου, Id.Ph. 239b34 (cf. infr. 111.2).
    III achievement, attainment,

    τηλοῦ ἐμοὶ νόστοιο τ. γλυκεροῖο γενέσθαι Od.22.323

    , cf. Pi.N.3.25;

    τ. δὲ τῆς ἀπαλλαγῆς τοῦ Αἰθίοπος ὧδε ἔλεγον γενέσθαι Hdt.2.139

    ; πῶς ἂν καὶ τοῦτο τοῦ τ. τυγχάνοι, i.e. might be achieved, Gem.8.36.
    2 winning-post, goal in a race,

    πρὸς τ. ὀρνύμενον B.5.45

    ; in a contest,

    ἔστιν δ' ἀφάνεια τύχας καὶ μαρναμένων, πρὶν τ. ἄκρον ἱκέσθαι Pi.I.4(3).32(50)

    ; εἰς τ. ἐλθεῖν, of runners in a race, Pl.R. 613c.
    b prize, ἔφερε πυγμᾶς τ. Pi.O.10(11).67; οὐ γὰρ ἦν πενταέθλιον ἀλλ' ἐφ' ἑκάστῳ ἔργματι κεῖτο τ. Id.I.1.27;

    ποτὶ γραμμᾷ μὲν αὐτὰν στᾶσεκοσμήσαις, τ. ἔμμεν ἄκρον Id.P.9.118

     (perh. 'to be the winning post and prize');

    κρίνεις τ. ἀρετᾶς B.10.6

    : metaph.,

    οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν τίνι τοῦτο Μοῖρα τ. ἔμπεδον ὤρεξε Pi.N.7.57

    .
    3 Philos., full realization, highest point. ideal, ἅπτεσθαι τοῦ τ. Pl.Smp. 211b; πρὸς τ. ἰὼν τῶν ἐρωτικῶν ib. 210e;

    πρὸς τ. ἀρετῆς ἐλθόντα Id.Clit. 410e

    , cf. R. 613c.
    b the end or purpose of action,

    τ. εἶναι ἁπασῶν τῶν πράξεων τὸ ἀγαθόν Id.Grg. 499e

    ; freq. in Arist., EN 1094a18, al.: hence, the final cause, = τὸ οὗ ἕνεκα, Id.Metaph. 994b9, 996a26, al.; hence simply = τὸ ἀγαθόν, the chief good, Id.EN 1097a21, Zeno Stoic.1.45, etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τέλος

  • 2 παρά

    πᾰρά [pron. full] [ρᾰ], [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also [full] παραί: shortd. [full] πάρ, in Hom., Lyr. (but rarely in Trag., in lyr. passages, A.Supp. 553, S.Tr. 636), and in all dial ects exc. [dialect] Att., GDI5434.8 ([place name] Paros), IG5(2).3.14 (Tegea, iv B. C.), Inscr.Magn.26.28 (Thess.), etc.:—Prep. c. gen., dat., and acc., prop.
    A beside: hence,
    A WITH GEN. prop. denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:
    I of Place,

    πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν Il.13.744

    ;

    παρὰ ναῦφιν ἐλευσόμεθ' 12.225

    , etc.;

    παρ' Ὠκεανοῖο ῥοάων.. ἐπερχομένη Od.22.197

    ;

    πὰρ νηῶν ἀπώσεται Il.8.533

    , etc.;

    δῶρα π. νηὸς ἐνεικέμεν 19.194

    ;

    φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος π. μηροῦ 1.190

    , cf. 21.173;

    σπασσάμενος.. ἄορ παχέος π. μηροῦ 16.473

    ; πλευρὰ παρ' ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield, 4.468, cf. A.Th. 624.
    II commonly of Persons,
    1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc.,

    ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός Il.2.787

    ;

    παρ' Αἰήταο πλέουσα Od.12.70

    , etc.;

    ἀγγελίη ἥκει π. βασιλέος Hdt.8.140

    .

    ά; αὐτομολήσαντες π. βασιλέως X.An.1.7.13

    ;

    ἐξεληλυθὼς παρ' Ἀριστάρχου D.21.117

    ; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, X.Cyr.4.5.53; so

    οἱ π. τινός Th.7.10

    , Ev.Marc.3.21, etc.;

    ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν π. βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτόν X.An.1.1.5

    , etc.; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ' Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, Il.18.137, cf. 617, etc.;

    ἀπαγγέλλειν τι π. τινός X.An.2.1.20

    ;

    σὺ δὲ οἰμώζειν αὐτοῖς παρ' ἐμοῦ λέγε Luc.DMort.1.2

    .
    2 issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι π. τινός to be born from, Pl.Smp. 179b; λόγος (sc. ἐστί) π. Ἀθηναίων c. acc. et inf., Hdt.8.55: freq. following a Noun, δόξα ἡ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων glory from (given by) men, Pl.Phdr. 232a; ἡ π. τινὸς εὔνοια the favour from, i. e. of, any one, X.Mem.2.2.12; τὸ παρ' ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Id.Cyr.5.5.13; τὰ π. τινός all that issues from any one, as commands, commissions, Id.An.2.3.4, etc.; or promises, gifts, presents, Id.Mem.3.11.13; τὰ παρ' ἐμοῦ my opinions, Pl.Smp. 219a; παρ' ἑωυτοῦ διδούς giving from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt. 2.129, 8.5;

    παρ' ἑαυτοῦ προσετίθει X.HG6.1.3

    ; νόμον θὲς παρ' ἐμοῦ by my advice, Pl.Prt. 322d; αὐτοὶ παρ' αὑτῶν of themselves, Id.Tht. 150d, cf. Phdr. 235c.
    3 with Verbs of receiving, obtaining, and the like ,

    τυχεῖν τινος π. τινός Od.6.290

    , 15.158;

    πὰρ δ' ἄρα μιν Ταφίων πρίατο 14.452

    ;

    ἀρέομαι πὰρ μὲν Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χάριν Pi.P.1.76

    ;

    εὑρέσθαι τι π. τῶν θεῶν Isoc.9.14

    , cf. IG12.40.10; δέχεσθαι, λαμβάνειν, ἁρπάζειν π. τινός, Th.1.20, X.Oec.9.11, Hes.Th. 914; ἀντιάσαι, αἰτήσασθαι π. τινός, S.El. 870 (lyr.), X.HG3.1.4;

    ἀξιοῖ π. τοῦ ἰατροῦ φάρμακον πιὼν ἐξεμέσαι τὸ νόσημα Pl.R. 406d

    ;

    κόσμος τοῖς πράξασι γίγνεται π. τῶν ἀκουσάντων Id.Mx. 236e

    : without Verb,

    ὁ καρπὸς ὁ π. τῶν δημάρχων IG12.76.27

    : with Verbs of learning, etc.,

    μεμαθηκέναι π. τινῶν Hdt.2.104

    , etc.
    4 with [voice] Pass. Verbs,

    πὰρ Διὸς.. μῆνις ἐτύχθη Il.15.122

    ;

    π. θεῶν ἡ τοιαύτη μανία δίδοται Pl.Phdr. 245c

    , etc.; τὰ π. τῶν θεῶν σημαινόμενα, συμβουλευόμενα, X.Cyr.1.6.2; τὰ π. τινὸς λεγόμενα ib.6.1.42; τὰ π. τῆς τύχης δωρηθέντα the presents of.., Isoc.4.26;

    με π. σοῦ σοφίας πληρωθήσεσθαι Pl.Smp. 175e

    .
    III rarely for παρά c. dat., by, near,

    πὰρ ποδός Pi.P.10.62

    , 3.60; παρὰ δὲ κυανέων πελαγέων dub. l. in S.Ant. 966 (lyr.);

    τὸν Ῥειτὸν τὸν παρὰ τοῦ ἄστεως IG12.81.5

    ; πολλοὶ παρ' ἀμφοτέρων ἔπιπτον, = ἀμφοτέρωθεν, D.S.19.42.
    IV π. τῆς συγχωρήσεώς τινος without his consent, BCH46.337 ([place name] Teos).
    B WITH DAT. denoting rest by the side of any person or thing, answering the question where?
    I of Places, κατ' ἂρ ἕζετ'.. πὰρ πυρί, ἔκειτο π. σηκῷ, Od.7.154, 9.319;

    νέμονται π. πέτρῃ 13.408

    ;

    ἑσταότες παρ ὄχεσφιν Il.8.565

    ; πὰρ ποσὶ μαρναμένων ἐκυλίνδετο at their feet, 14.411, etc.; π. θύρῃσι at the door, 7.346;

    π. ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης 2.773

    ;

    δεῖπνον.. εἵλοντο παρ' ὄχθῃσιν ποταμοῖο Od.6.97

    , cf. Il.4.475, 20.53, etc.;

    κεῖσθαι παρ' Ἅιδῃ S.OT 972

    ; παρ' οἴνῳ over wine, ib. 780, etc.
    2 at one's house or place, with one,

    μένειν π. τισί 9.427

    ;

    θητευέμεν ἄλλῳ, ἀνδρὶ παρ' ἀκλήρῳ Od.11.490

    ;

    φιλέεσθαι π. τινί Il.13.627

    ; παρ' ἑωυτοῖσι at their own house, Hdt.1.105, cf. 86;

    παιδευθῆναι π. τινί X.Cyr.1.2.15

    ;

    καταλύειν π. τινί D.18.82

     (but

    παρά τινα καταλῦσαι Th.1.136

    ), etc.: hence οἱ παρ' ἐμοί those of my household, X.Mem.2.7.4, etc.; τὰ παρ' ἐμοί life with me, Id.An. 1.7.4; οἱ παρ' ἡμῖν ἄνθρωποι our people, Pl.Phd. 64b; ἡ παρ' ἡμῖν πολιτεία, ὁ παρ' ὑμῖν δῆμος, D.15.19; ὁ παρ' αὑτῷ βίοτος one's own life, S.OT 612;

    τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν πῦρ Pl.Phlb. 29f

    ;

    ὅσος παρ' ὑμῖν ὁ φθόνος φυλάσσεται S.OT 382

    ;

    τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν σῶμα Pl.Phlb. 29f

    ; also, in one's hands,

    τὰ π. τοῖς Ἑλληνοταμίαις ὄντα IG12.91.6

    ;

    ἔχειν παρ' ἑωυτῷ Hdt. 1.130

    , etc.; οὔπω παρ' ἐμοὶ τότ' ἦν λέγειν I had no right to speak then, Men.Epit.98.
    3 before, in the presence of,

    ἤειδε π. μνηστῆρσιν Od. 1.154

    ; before a judge,

    δίκας γίγνεσθαι π. τῷ πολεμάρχῳ IG12.16.9

    ;

    π. Δαρείῳ κριτῇ Hdt.3.160

    ;

    π. τῷ βασιλέϊ Id.4.65

    ;

    παρὰ δικασταῖς Th. 1.73

    ;

    εἰς κρίσιν καθιστάναι τινὰ π. τισί D.18.13

    : hence παρ' ἐμοί in my judgement, Hdt.1.32, cf. S.Tr. 589, E.Heracl. 881, 1 Ep.Cor.3.19; π. τούτῳ μέγα δυνήσεται with him, Pl.Grg. 510e.
    4 in quoting authors, παρ' Ἐφόρῳ, παρ' Αἰσχίνῃ, π. Θουκυδίδῃ, in Ephorus, etc., Plb. 9.2.4, D.H.Comp.9,18.
    III Arc., = π. c. gen., from,

    καθὰ εἶχον τὰς ἰντολὰς π. τᾷ ἰδίᾳ πόλι SIG559.9

     (Megalop., iii B. C.), cf. 558.10 (Ithaca, iii B. C.).
    C WITH ACCUS. in three main senses,
    I beside, near, by,
    II along,
    III past, beyond.
    I beside, near, by:
    1 with Verbs of coming, going, etc., to the side of, to,

    ἴτην π. νῆας Il.1.347

    , cf. 8.220, etc.;

    βῆ.. π. θῖνα 1.34

    , cf. 327, etc.; τρέψας πὰρ ποταμόν to the side of.., 21.603, cf. 3.187: more freq. of persons, εἶμι παρ' Ἥφαιστον to the chamber of H., 18.143, cf. Od.1.285, etc.;

    ἐσιόντες π. τοὺς φίλους Th.2.51

    , etc.;

    φοιτᾶν π. τὸν Σωκράτη Pl.Phd. 59d

    ; πέμπειν ἀγγέλους, πρέσβεις π. τινά, Hdt. 1.141, Th.1.58, etc.;

    ἄγειν π. τινά Hdt.1.86

    ;

    καταφυγὴ π. φίλων τινάς Th.2.17

    .
    2 with Verbs of rest, beside, near, by, sts. with ref. to past motion (expressed in such phrases as

    ἧσο παρ' αὐτὸν ἰοῦσα Il.3.406

    , cf. 11.577),

    ἔς ῥα θρόνους ἕζοντο παρ' Ἀτρεΐδην Μενέλαον Od.4.51

    , cf. 13.372; κεῖται ποταμοῖο παρ' ὄχθας lies stretched beside.., Il.4.487, cf. 12.381; παρ' ἔμ' ἵστασο come and stand by me, 11.314, cf. 592, 20.49, etc.;

    π. πυθμέν' ἐλαίης θῆκαν Od.13.122

    ;

    καταθέτω π. τὰ ἴκρια IG12.94.28

    ; κοιμήσαντο π. πρυμνήσια they lay down by.., Od.12.32, cf. 3.460;

    ὁ παρ' ἐμὲ καθήμενος Pl.Euthd. 271b

    , cf. Phd. 89b; ἐκάθητο π. τὴν πύλην, π. τὴν ὁδόν, LXX Ge.19.1, Ev.Marc. 10.46;

    παρ' αὐτὸν τὸν καλέσαντα κατακείμενος δειπνῆσαι Thphr.Char. 21.2

    , cf. Pl.Smp. 175c;

    ἐκαθέζετο π. τὸν Λύσιν Id.Ly. 211a

    , cf. R. 328c;

    στὰς παρ' αὐτόν Id.Phd. 116c

    ;

    τέμενος νεμόμεσθα.. παρ' ὄχθας Il.12.313

    , cf. 6.34, IG12.943.45;

    τοῦ Εὐρίπου, παρ' ὃν ᾤκει Aeschin.3.90

    ;

    κατελείφθη π. τὸν νηόν Hdt.4.87

    ;

    τὴν παρ' ἐμὲ ἐοῦσαν δύναμιν Id.8.140

    .ά (v.l. ἐμοί)

    ; εἶπεν αὐτῷ μένειν παρ' ἑαυτόν X.Cyr.1.4.18

    , cf. An.1.9.31, Ar.Fr. 451, Is.8.16, Alex.248, Demetr.Com. Nov.1.5, IG22.654.23 (iii B. C.), Plb.3.26.1, 11.14.3, 28.14.3;

    ἡ π. θάλασσαν Μακεδονία Th.2.99

    , cf. S.El. 184 (lyr.), Tr. 636 (lyr.);

    Καρβασυανδῆς π. Καῦνον IG12.204.52

    ;

    τὸ κουρεῖον τὸ π. τοὺς Ἑρμᾶς Lys.23.3

    , cf. And.1.62, Is.6.20, 8.35, Aeschin. 1.182, 3.88, Lycurg.112;

    τᾶς παστάδος τᾶς παρ' Ἀπόλλωνα IG42

     (1).109 iii 146 (Epid.); παρ' ὄμμα before one's eyes, E.Supp. 484; π. πόδας on the spot, Phld.Ir.p.78 W., Rh.2.2 S.; immediately thereafter, Plb.1.7.5, 1.8.2, al.
    b [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., and Thess., = supr. B. 11.2, at the house of.., with a person, IG7.3171.7 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.), GDI 1717 (Delph.); παρ' ἁμὲ πολυτίματος [ὁ σῖτος] Ar.Ach. 759 (Megar.);

    τοῖς κατοικέντεσσι πὰρ ἀμμέ IG9(2).517.18

     (Larissa, iii B. C.); τοῖ πὰρ ἀμμὲ πολιτεύματος ib.13;

    πεπολιτευκὼρ πὰρ ἁμέ Schwyzer 425.5

     (Elis, iii/ii B. C.): so in [dialect] Att., θέμενος π. γυναῖκας depositing with.., Pl. R. 465c.
    3 with Verbs of striking, wounding, etc.,

    βάλε στῆθος π. μαζόν Il.4.480

    , etc.;

    τὸν δ' ἕτερον.. κληῗδα παρ' ὦμον πλῆξε 5.146

    ;

    τύψε κατὰ κληῗδα παρ' αὐχένα 21.117

    , cf. 4.525, 8.325, etc.;

    αἰχμὴ δ' ἐξελύθη παρὰ νείατον ἀνθερεῶνα 5.293

    , cf. 17.310; δησάμενος τελαμῶνι π. σφυρόν ib. 290.
    4 with Verbs of placing, examining, etc., side by side with..,

    ὁ ἔλεγχος π. τὸν ἔλεγχον παραβαλλόμενος Pl.Grg. 475e

    , cf. Hp.Mi. 369c, Smp. 214c, R. 348a;

    ἐξέτασον παρ' ἄλληλα τὰ σοὶ κἀμοὶ βεβιωμένα D.18.265

    ;

    ἄλλα παρ' ἄλλατιθέμενα.. τῶν χρωμάτων Arist.Mete. 375a24

    .
    b Geom., παραβάλλειν π. apply an area to (i. e. along) a finite straight line, Euc.1.44, Archim.Aequil.2.1;

    π. τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτοῦ γραμμὴν παρατείναντα Pl. Men. 87a

    ; ἡ [εὐθεῖα] παρ' ἣν δύνανται αἱ καταγόμεναι τεταγμένως the line to which are applied the squares of the or dinates, etc., Apollon. Perg.Con.1.11: hence,
    c Arith., παραβάλλειν τι π. τι divide by.. (v.

    παραβάλλω A.

     VII. 2);

    μερίζω τι π. τι Dioph.4.33

    ; ἐπὶ γ π. ί multiply by 3 and divide by 10, PLond.5.1718.2 (vi A. D.).
    5 Geom., parallel to.., Democr.155, Arist. Top. 158b31, Archim.Sph. Cyl.1.12, al.
    6 metaph. in Gramm., like, as a parody of.., π. τὸ Σοφόκλειον, π. τὰ ἐν Τεύκρῳ Σοφοκλέους, Sch.Ar.Av. 1240, Nu. 584.
    b Gramm., of words which differ as compared with other words, π. τὸ τοῦ ἔρωτος ὄνομα σμικρὸν παρηγμένον ἐστίν.. [τὸ ἥρως] Pl.Cra. 398d, cf. 399a, Lg. 654a: hence, derived from.., π. τὸ ἔδαφος, δάπεδον, A.D. Pron.31.16; π. τὸ δρῶ δρᾶμα Sch.A.R.2.624;

    σύγκειται [τὸ αὐθέντης] π. τὸ εἷναι.. καὶ π. τὸ αὐτός Phryn.PSp.24

     B.
    7 generally, of Comparison, alongside of, compared with, usu. implying superiority,

    δοκέοντες π. ταῦτα οὐδ' ἂν τοὺς σοφωτάτους ἀνθρώπων Αἰγυπτίους οὐδὲν ἐπεξευρεῖν Hdt.2.160

    , cf. 7.20, 103;

    ἡλίου ἐκλείψεις αἳ πυκνότεραι π. τὰ ἐκ τοῦ πρὶν χρόνου μνημονευόμενα ξυνέβησαν Th.1.23

    , cf. 4.6;

    τῶν ἁπάντων ἀπερίοπτοί εἰσι π. τὸ νικᾶν Id.1.41

    ;

    π. τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ ἄνθρωποι βιοτεύουσι X.Mem.1.4.14

    ;

    φαίνεται π. τὸ ἀλγεινὸν ἡδὺ καὶ π. τὸ ἡδὺ ἀλγεινὸν ἡ ἡσυχία Pl.R. 584a

    , cf. Phdr. 236d, La. 183c, al.;

    εὐδαίμων μᾶλλον π. πάντας BCH26.332

     ([place name] Halae);

    προετέρει π. πάντας PSI 4.422.34

     (iii B. C.): sts. implying inferiority or defect, ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν βραχύ τι παρ' ἀγγέλους a little lower than the angels, LXX Ps. 8.6; μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ ὑστεροῦσι π. τὸν ἥλιον lag one day behind the sun, Gem.8.19; so perh. παρ' αὐτόν, ὑπὲρ αὐτόν (has passed the ball?) short of him, beyond him, Antiph.234; μέγα τοι ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη γνώμην ἐξ ὀργῆς μεταστῆσαι one day compared with another is important.., a day's delay makes a difference, Antipho 5.72; τί γὰρ παρ' ἦμαρ ἡμέρα τέρπειν ἔχει προσθεῖσα κἀναθεῖσα τοῦ γε κατθανεῖν; what joy has one day compared with another to offer, since it only brings us nearer to, or farther from, death (which is neither good nor evil)? S.Aj. 475; ὃς μὲν κρίνει (prefers) ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν, ὃς δὲ κρίνει (approves)

    πᾶσαν ἡμέραν Ep.Rom.14.5

    .
    8 with Verbs of estimating, to set at so and so much, hence π. = equivalent to.., ταρβῶ μὴ.. θῆται παρ' οὐδὲν τὰς ἐμὰς ἐπιστολάς set at nought, E.IT 732, cf. A. Ag. 229 (lyr.);

    παρ' οὐδὲν ἄγειν S.Ant.35

    ; π. μικρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι hold of small account, Isoc.5.79, D.61.51;

    παρ' ὀλίγον ποιεῖσθαί τινα X.An.6.6.11

    ; so with εἶναι, etc., παρ' οὐδέν ἐστι are as nothing, S.OT 983, cf. Ant. 466;

    παρ' οὐδὲν αὐταῖς ἦν ἂν ὀλλύναι πόσεις E.Or. 569

    ;

    οὐ π. μέγα ἔσεσθαι τὸ πταῖσμα Arr.An.1.18.6

    ; so perh. π. σμικρὰ κεχώρηκε have turned out of little account, have amounted to little, Hdt.1.120.
    b in Accountancy, without a verb, π. τὴν καταλλαγήν on account of κ., PHib.1.100.4 (iii B. C.).
    9 of correspondence, ὀφείλειν στατῆρα π. στατῆρα stater for stater (one to each of two creditors), BCH50.214 (Thasos, v B. C.);

    πληγὴν π. πληγὴν ἑκάτερον Ar.Ra. 643

    ; συνεῖναι ἑκατέρῳ ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν stayed day for day with each, D.59.46; hence of alternation, ποιεῖσθαι ἁγνείας καὶ θυσίας δύο π. δύο, of four priests acting two and two alternately, BGU1198.12 (i B. C.); τοῦ καθημερινοῦ ἢ μίαν π. μίαν (sc. ἡμέραν) [πυρετοῦ] quotidian or tertian fever, ib.956.3 (iii A. D.): sts. without doubling of the Noun, παρ' ἡμέρην, opp. καθ' ἡμέρην, tertian, opp. quotidian, Hp.Aph.1.12; καθ' ἡμέραν, παρ' ἡμέραν, π. δύο, π. τρεῖς every day, every second day, every third (fourth) day, Arr.Epict.2.18.13; π. μίαν every second day, Plb.3.110.4; παρ' ἐνιαυτόν every second year, Plu.Cleom.15; παρ' ἔτος year and year about, Arist.GA 757a7; every second year, Paus.8.15.2; π. μέρος by turns (v. μέρος II. 2);

    ὁ ἀνὰ μέρος παρ' ἓξ μῆνας ὑπὲρ γῆν τε καὶ ὑπὸ γῆν γινόμενος Ἄδωνις Corn. ND28

    ; π. μῆνα τρίτον every third month, Arist.HA 582b4, cf. Plu.2.942e; but π. τρία [ἔτεα] prob. every fourth year, IG5(2).422 ([place name] Phigalea), cf. Arr.Epict. l.c.; ἕνα παρ' ἕνα παραλειπτέον every second one, Nicom.Ar.1.18; ἕνα π. δύο ([etym.] τρεῖς) every third (fourth) one, ibid.; παρὰ δ' ἄλλαν ἄλλα μοῖρα διώκει now one now another, E.Heracl. 611.
    10 precisely at the moment of, παρ' αὐτὰ τἀδικήματα flagrante delicto, D.18.13, 21.26;

    ἀποδώσω π. τὸν εὔθυνον τὸ καθῆκον IG12.188.31

    ; π. τοιοῦτον καιρόν, π. τὰς χρείας, D.20.41,46; π. τὰ δεινά in the midst of danger, Plu.Ant.63;

    π. τὴν πρώτην γένεσιν Jul.Or.1.10b

    ; π. τὴν πρώτην (sc. ἐπίθεσιν) at the first attack, Hld.9.2;

    π. γε τὴν πρώτην ὁρμήν Ael.NA14.10

    .
    b distributively, whether of Time, π. τὰ ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα in each complete period of seventy years, Hdt.1.32;

    ἐν ταῖς ὁδοιπορίαις π. στάδια διακόσια.. τοῖς ἑκατὸν σταδίοις διήνεγκαν ἀλλήλων X.Oec.20.18

    ; πὰρ Ϝέτος each year, every year, Tab.Heracl. 1.101;

    π. τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ἕκαστον IG12(7).5.14

     ([place name] Amorgos); παρ' ἆμάρ τε καὶ νύκτα day and night, B.Fr.7; or more generally, πὰρ τὰν ἐλαίαν in respect of each olive plant, Tab.Heracl.1.122; παρ' ἡμέραν αἱ ἀμίαι πολὺ ἐπιδήλως αὐξάνονται from day to day, per day, Arist.HA 571a21;

    τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην βάσιν γινόμενον μικρὸν πολὺ γίνεται π. πολλάς Id.Pr. 881b26

    ;

    ἡ παρ' ἡμέραν χάρις D.8.70

    ;

    τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν ἡδύ Pl. Lg. 705a

    .
    c παρ' ἆμαρ on (this) day, to-day, τὸ μὲν πὰρ ἆμαρ, τὸ δέ .. to-day and to-morrow, Pi.P.11.63; but παρ' ἦμαρ to-morrow, S. OC 1455 (lyr.).
    d throughout a period of time,

    π. τὴν ζόην Hdt. 7.46

    ;

    π. τὸν βίον ἅπαντα Pl.Lg. 733a

    ;

    π. πάντα τὸν χρόνον D.18.10

    ; also more loosely, during, π. τὴν πόσιν while they were drinking, Hdt.2.121.

    δ; π. τὸν πότον Aeschin.2.156

    ;

    π. τὴν κύλικα Plu.Ant.24

    ; π. δεῖπνον or π. τὸ δεῖπνον, Id.2.737a,674f.
    II along,

    ὄνος παρ' ἄρουραν ἰών Il.11.558

    ;

    βῆ δὲ θέειν π. τεῖχος 12.352

    ;

    π. ῥόον Ὠκεανοῖο ᾔομεν Od. 11.21

    ;

    ἔπλεον π. τὴν ἤπειρον Hdt.7.193

    ;

    π. πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδόν Isoc.4.148

    ; ὀρθὴν παρ' οἶμον.. τύμβον κατόψει straight along the road, E.Alc. 835;

    παρ' ὅλην τὴν φάραγγα Plb.10.30.3

    ; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χαράδραν παραπορευομένων ib.9; for παραβάλλειν π., v. supr. c. 1.4b.
    2 strictly according to, without deviating from,

    εἶμι π. στάθμην ὀρθὴν ὁδόν Thgn. 945

    , cf. S.Fr.474.5; ὠμοί τε δούλοις πάντα καὶ π. στάθμην, i.e. too strict, A.Ag. 1045; π. τὸν λόγον ὃν ἀποφέρουσιν.. ἐπιδείξω I will prove to you strictly according to the accounts which they themselves submit, D.27.34.
    III past, beyond,

    παρὰ σκοπιὴν καὶ ἐρινεὸν ἠνεμόεντα.. ἐσσεύοντο Il.22.145

    , cf. Od.3.172, 24.12;

    βῆ δὲ π. Κρουνούς h.Ap. 425

    ; π. τὴν Βαβυλῶνα παριέναι pass by Babylon, X.Cyr.5.2.29; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χύτραν ἄκραν ὁρῶντες looking over the edge of.., Ar.Av. 390.
    2 metaph., over and above, in addition to,

    οὐκ ἔστι π. ταῦτ' ἄλλα Id.Nu. 698

    ;

    π. ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a

    , cf.R. 337d, D.18.139, X.HG 1.5.5; ἑκὼν ἐπόνει π. τοὺς ἄλλους more than the others, Id.Ages.5.3, cf. Mem.4.4.1, Oec.20.16;

    ἃ τῷ ῥαψῳδῷ προσήκει καὶ σκοπεῖσθαι καὶ διακρίνειν π. τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους Pl. Ion 539e

    .
    3 metaph., in excess over, πὰρ δύναμιν beyond one's strength, Il.13.787, cf. Th.1.70, Hyp.Lyc.16, Arist.Rh.Al. 1423b29;

    π. τὴν δ. Id.Po. 1451b38

    .
    4 metaph., in transgression or violation of,

    π. μοῖραν Od.14.509

    ;

    π. μοῖραν Δίος Alc.Supp. 14.10

    ; παρ' αἶσαν, παρὰ δίκαν, Pi.P.8.13, O.2.16, etc.;

    π. τὸ δίκαιον Th.5.90

    , etc.; π. τὰς σπονδάς, τὸν νόμον, Id.1.67, X.HG1.7.14;

    π. φύσιν Th.6.17

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 747b; π. τὴν στήλην prob. in IG12.45.20; π. καιρόν out of season, Pi.O.8.24, etc.; π. γνώμαν ib.12.10, cf. A.Supp. 454; π. δόξαν, π. τὸ δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, π. λόγον, Th.3.93, 1.84, Plb.2.38.5; παρ' ἐλπίδα or ἐλπίδας, A.Ag. 899, S.Ant. 392, etc.; πὰρ μέλος out of tune, Pi.N.7.69;

    π. τὴν ἀξίαν Th.7.77

    , etc.; π. τὸ εἰωθός, τὸ καθεστηκός, Id.4.17, 1.98.
    5 π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, = παρῆλθε τοσοῦτον κινδύνου, passed over so much ground within the sphere of danger, i.e. incurred such imminent peril, Id.3.49, cf. 7.2; in such phrases the tmesis was forgotten, and the acc. came to be governed by παρά, which thus came to mean 'by such and such a margin', ' with so much to spare', ἐνίκησαν π. πολύ, ἡσσηθέντες π. πολύ, Id.1.29, 2.89, cf. Pl. Ap. 36a; παρὰ δ' ὀλίγον ἀπέφυγες only just, E.IT 870 (lyr.);

    παρ' ὀλίγον ἢ διέφευγον ἢ ἀπώλλυντο Th.7.71

    ; δεινότατον π. πολύ by far, Ar.Pl. 445; παρ' ὅσον quatenus, Luc.Nec.17, etc.; π. δύο ψήφους ἀπέφυγε by two votes, Hyp.Eux.28, cf. D.23.205;

    π. τέτταρας ψήφους μετέσχε τῆς πόλεως Is.3.37

    ; π. τοσοῦτον ἐγένετο αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν by so much (= little) he missed falling in with.., Th.8.33; π. πέντε ναῦς πλέον ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ ἢ τρεῖς ὀβολοὶ ὡμολογήθησαν ib.29; οὐ π. μικρὸν ἐποίησαν they made no little difference, Isoc.4.59.
    b in phrases like π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, τοσοῦτον was sts. understood of the interval from danger, etc., and παρά came to mean 'by so much short of' (

    τὸ π. μικρὸν ὥσπερ οὐδὲν ἀπέχειν δοκεῖ Arist.Ph. 197a29

    ), within such and such a distance of, so near to, τὴν Ἠϊόνα π. νύκτα ἐγένετο (sc. αὐτῷ) λαβεῖν he was within one night of taking E., Th.4.106; π. μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν I came within a little of.., Isoc. 19.22, cf. Plb.1.43.7, Plu. Caes. 39; παρ' ἐλάχιστον ἦλθε.. ἀφελέσθαι was within an ace of taking away, Th.8.76; παρ' οὐδὲν μὲν ἦλθον ἀποκτεῖναι (were within a mere nothing, within an ace of killing him),

    ἐξεκήρυξαν δ' ἐκ πόλεως Aeschin. 3.258

    , cf. Plu.Pyrrh. 14, Alex.62; π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε διαφυγεῖν so near he came to escaping, Luc.Cat.4;

    παρὰ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Ὀλυμπιάδα Hdt.9.33

    ;

    παρ' οὐδὲν ἐλθόντες τοῦ ἀποβαλεῖν Plb.1.45.14

    , cf. 2.55.4, D.S.17.42: hence without ἐγένετο or ἐλθεῖν, π. μίαν μονάδα (less) by one, i.e. less one, Nicom.Ar.1.8; τεσσαράκοντα π. μίαν, = 39, 2 Ep.Cor.11.24; παρ' ἕνα τοσοῦτοι the same number less one, Plu. Publ.9; σύ μοι παρ' ἕνα ἥκεις ἄγων you have brought me one too few, Luc.Cat.4;

    δύναται π. δύο συλλαβὰς εἶναι τὸ καταληκτόν Heph.4.2

    ; τὰ ὁλοκόττινα ηὑρέθησαν π. ἑπτὰ κεράτια seven carats short, PMasp.70.2 (vi A. D.); πάντες παρ' ἕνα, πάντες παρ' ὀλίγους, all save one (a few), Plu.Cat.Mi.20, Ant.5;

    ἔτη δύο π. ἡμέρας δύο IG5(1).801

     ([place name] Laconia); of one Μάρκος, θηρίον εἶ π. γράμμα you are a bear ([etym.] ἄρκος) all but a letter, AP11.231 (Ammian.); ὡς π. τι καὶ τὰς ὄψεις ἀφανίσαι so that he all but (lit. less something) lost his sight, Vett.Val.228.6; π. τι βυθίζεσθαι v.l. in Ev.Luc.5.7; τὸ π. τοῦτο the figure less that, i.e. the remainder or difference, PTeb.99.10 (ii B. C.), cf. POxy.264.4 (i A. D.), PAmh.2.148.5 (v A. D.); hence of any difference whether of excess or defect, οὐδὲν π. τοῦτο ποιούμενοι τοὺς.. Λευκανούς τε καὶ τοὺς.. Σαυνίτας making no difference between.., Str.6.1.3, cf. 14.5.11, Plu.2.24c.
    6 hence of the margin by which anything increases or decreases, and so of the cause according to which anything comes into existence or varies,

    τὸ εὖ π. μικρὸν διὰ πολλῶν ἀριθμῶν γίνεται Polyclit.2

     (cf. μικρός III. 5 c); διαφέρει π. τὰς τῶν παθημάτων ἐναντιώσεις according to.., Arist.HA 486b5;

    μεταπίπτει π. τὰ κλίματα Gem. 5.29

    , cf. 11.5, al.; π. τὰ πράγματα cj. in Apollod.Car.11.
    7 more generally of the margin by which an event occurs, i.e. of the necessary and sufficient cause or motive (

    τὸ μὴ π. τοῦτο γίνεσθαι τότε λέγομεν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τούτου μηδὲν ἧττον περαίνηται ὁ συλλογισμός Arist.APr. 65b6

    , cf. 48a24, al.), κεινὰν π. δίαιταν just for the sake of unsatisfying food, Pi.O.2.65; ἕκαστος οὐ π. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν οἴεται βλάψειν each thinks that his own negligence will not suffice to cause injury, Th.1.141, cf. Isoc.3.48; π. τὴν αὑτοῦ ἁμαρτίαν all through his own fault, Antipho 3.4.5, cf. Isoc.6.52, D.4.11, 18.232; πολλὰ.. ἐστιν αἴτια τούτων, καὶ οὐ παρ' ἓν οὐδὲ δύ' εἰς τοῦτο τὰ πράγματ' ἀφῖκται not from one or two causes only, Id.9.2; οὐ π. τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι it does not follow that it is not.., 1 Ep.Cor.12.15; π. τὸ τὴν ἀρίθμησιν ποιήσασθαι ἐξ ἑτοίμου τοὺς ἐργώνας οὐκ ὀλίγα χρήματα περιεποίησε τῇ πόλει by the simple fact of prompt payment, IPE12.32B35 (Olbia, iii B. C.);

    οὐδὲν ἂν παρ' ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο τούτων Lycurg.63

    , cf. Plb.3.103.2, 18.28.6, al.; οὐδεὶς παρ' ἑαυτόν ἐστι βασιλεύς thanks to himself alone, Aristeas 224;

    παρ' αὑτὸν ἀτυχεῖ Arr.Epict.3.24.2

    , cf. Phld.Rh.2.16 S.;

    παρ' ἡμᾶς ἡ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀπόστασις Hierocl. in CA25p.477M.

    ; εἶναι π. τοῦτο σωτηρίαν τε πόλει καὶ τοὐναντίον, i.e. on this depends.., Pl.Lg. 715d, cf. X.Eq.Mag.1.5, D.C.Fr.36.5;

    π. μίαν ἡμέραν καὶ ἓν πρᾶγμα καὶ ἀπόλλυται προκοπὴ καὶ σῴζεται Epict.Ench.51.2

    ; π. τὸ Ἕλληνά με εἶναι just because I am a Greek, UPZ7.13 (ii B. C.);

    π. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν αὐτήν LXX Ge.29.20

    , cf. Ex.14.11; later more loosely, because of.., Phld.Rh.1.158 S., Gem.6.24, etc.; οὐδὲν π. σὲ γέγονε it is no fault of yours, PRyl.243.6 (ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1420.7 (ii A. D.).
    8 of a limit of possibility,

    εἴπερ ἐνεδέχετο π. τοὺς παρόντας καιρούς D.18.239

    ; πεῖσαι τό γε παρ' αὑτόν to persuade (the judges) so far as in you lies, Arr.Epict.2.2.20; οἴμωζε παρ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, for all I care, Ar.Av. 846.
    D POSITION: παρά may follow its Subst. in all three cases, but then becomes by anastrophe πάρα: when the ult. is elided, the practice varies,

    τῇσι παρ' Il.18.400

    ; but Ἡφαίστοιο πάρ' ib. 191.
    E παρά abs., as ADV., near, together, Il.1.611, al., E.IA 201 (lyr.).
    F πάρα (with anastrophe) stands for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, Il.1.174, Hes.Op. 454, A.Pers. 167, Hdt.1.42, al., S.El. 285, Ar.Ach. 862, etc.
    I alongside of, beside, of rest, παράκειμαι, παράλληλοι, παρέζομαι, πάρειμι (εἰμί), παρίστημι; of motion, παραπλέω, πάρειμι ([etym.] εἶμι).
    II to the side of, to, παραδίδωμι, παρέχω.
    III to one side of, by, past, παρέρχομαι, παροίχομαι, παραπέμπω, παρακμάζω, παρατρέχω.
    IV metaph.,
    1 aside or beyond, i.e. amiss, wrong, παραβαίνω, παράγω, παροράω, παρορκέω, παρακούω, παραγιγνώσκω.
    2 of comparison, as in παραβάλλω, παρατίθημι.
    3 of alteration or change, as in παραλλάσσω, παραπείθω, παραπλάσσω, παρατεκταίνω, παραυδάω, παράφημι.
    4 of a side-issue, παραπόλλυμι. (Cogn. with Goth. faúr 'along', Lat. por-.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > παρά

  • 3 παρέχω

    παρέχω, [tense] fut.
    A

    παρέξω Od.18.317

    , Th.8.48,

    παρασχήτω Id.6.86

    , Isoc. 6.71, 15.248 : [tense] pf. παρέσχηκα : [tense] aor. παρέσχον, [dialect] Ep. inf.

    παρασχέμεν Il. 19.147

     ; imper.

    παράσχες E.Hec. 842

     ( παράσχε is f.l.) ; poet.

    παρέσχεθον Hes. Th. 639

    , inf.

    παρασχεθεῖν Ar.Eq. 321

     ; [dialect] Aeol.

    παρέσκεθον Alc. Oxy.1788

     Fr.15 ii 11 ; παρεχέσκετο is f.l. for παρεκέσκετο in Od.14.521. [In Od.19.113, πᾱρέχη.]
    A [voice] Act., hand over, Il.18.556 ; furnish, supply,

    φάος πάντεσσι παρέξω Od.18.317

     ;

    δῶρα Il.19.147

     ; esp. in Od., ἱερήϊα, βρῶσίν τε πόσιν τε, σῖτον, 14.250, 15.490, 18.360 : abs., ἐγὼ δ' εὖ πᾶσι παρέξω I will provide for all, 8.39 ;

    π. νέας Hdt.4.83

    , 7.21 ;

    τεταρτημόριον τοῦ μισθώματος Id.2.180

     ;

    χρήματα Th.8.48

     ; ἀργύριον, ποίμνια, IG12.39.69,45.4 ;

    αἱ δὲ Συράκουσαι σῦς.. παρέχουσιν Hermipp.63.9

     ; πληρώμαθ' ἡ πόλις παρέχει the state finds men to man the ships, D.21.155, cf. Lys. 19.43.
    2 of natural objects, yield, produce,

    θάλασσα π. ἰχθῦς Od.19.113

     ; [ σίδηρον] παρέξει (sc. σόλος) Il.23.835.
    3 of incorporeal things, afford, cause, φιλότητα, ἀρετήν, γέλω τε καὶ εὐφροσύνην, 3.354, Od.18.133, 20.8 ;

    ὀνίαις Alc.88

     ;

    π. εἰράναν τισί Pi.P.9.23

     ;

    ὕμνον Id.N.6.33

     ;

    αἶσαν Id.O.6.102

     ;

    Σάρδεσιπένθος A.Pers. 322

     ; τύχην, φρίκην, S.OT53, 1306 (anap.); χάριν, εὔνοιαν, Id.OC 1498(lvr.), Tr. 708 ; ὄχλον, πρήγματα π., Hdt. 1.86, al. (v. πρᾶγμα)

    ; πόνον Alc.19

    , Hdt.1.177 ;

    ἔργον Ar.Nu. 523

     ;

    π. εὔνοιαν εἴς τινα Antipho 5.76

     ; αἴσθησιν παρέχει τινός enables one to observe a thing, Th.2.50 ; but αἴσθησιν π., abs., it causes remark, is perceived, Id.3.22, X.An.4.6.13 ; πενία ἀνάγκῃ τὴν τόλμαν π. Th.3.45 ; ὑφειμένου δόξαν π., = ὑφειμένῳ ἐοικέναι, Plu.2.131a.
    II present or offer for a purpose,
    1 c. inf., [ ὄϊες]

    παρέχουσι.. γάλα θῆσθαι Od.4.89

     ;

    π. τὸ σῶμα τύπτειν Ar.Nu. 441

     ;

    τὸ στράτευμα π. τισὶ διαφθεῖραι Th.8.50

     (withoutinf.,

    πτήξας δέμας παρεῖχε A.Pers. 210

    ): with reflex. Pron., ἐμαυτόν σοι ἐμμελετᾶν π. I give myself up to you to practise upon, Pl.Phdr. 228e ;

    π. ἐμαυτὸν ἐρωτᾶν Id.Ap. 33b

    , cf. Prt. 312c ;

    π. ἑαυτοὺς τοῖς ἄρχουσι χρῆσθαι ἤν τι δέωνται X.Cyr.1.2.9

     : rarely with a part.,

    π. ἑαυτὸν δεδησόμενον Luc. Tox. 35

    .
    2 give oneself up, submit oneself, ἑαυτόν being omitted,

    π. [ἑωυτοὺς] διαφθαρῆναι Hdt.9.17

     ; πατεῖν παρεῖχετῷ θέλοντι [ ἑαυτόν] S. Aj. 1146, cf. Ar.Nu. 422 ;

    τοῖς ἰατροῖς παρέχουσι.. ἀποτέμνειν καὶ ἀποκάειν X.Mem.1.2.54

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 456b ; τῷ λόγῳ ὥσπερ ἰατρῷ παρέχων ἀποκρίνου ib. 475d, cf. Tht. 191a;

    ἕτοιμός εἰμί σοι παρέχειν ἀποκρινόμενος Id.Prt. 348a

     ; esp. of a woman, sens. obsc., Ar.Lys. 162, 227, Luc. DMeretr.5.4, etc. (in full,

    π. ἑαυτήν Id.DMar.13.1

    , Artem.1.78).
    3 with reflex. Pron. and a predicative, show, exhibit oneself so and so,

    π. ἐμαυτὸν ὅσιον καὶ δίκαιον Antipho 2.2.2

     ; σπάνιον σεαυτὸν π. Pl. Euthphr.3d ; σαυτὸν σοφιστὴν π. Id.Prt. 312a ;

    ἑαυτὸν π. εὐπειθῆ X.Cyr. 2.1.22

     ; μέτριον ἐμαυτὸν π. Aeschin.1.1 ;

    τοιοῦτον πολίτην Lys.14.1

     ;

    π.ἐν τῷ μέσῳ ἐμαυτόν X.Cyr.7.5.46

     ;

    δέμασἀ κέντητον παρέχων Pi.O.1.21

    .
    III allow, grant,

    σιγὴν παρασχὼν κλῦθί μου S.Tr. 1115

     : c. inf., ἐπεὶ παρέσχες ἀντιφωνῆσαι did'st allow me to.., ib. 1114 ;

    π. αὐτοὺς δικαστὰς.. γίγνεσθαι Th.1.37

     : abs. in imperat., πάρεχε make way, E. Tr. 308, Cyc. 203, Ar.V. 1326, Av. 1720 (all lyr.) ;

    πάρεχ' ἐκποδών Id.V. 949

    .
    2 impers., παρέχει τινί c. inf., it is allowed, in one's power to do so and so,

    παρεῖχε ἄν σφι εὐδαιμονέειν Hdt.1.170

    , cf. 3.73, al., Pi.I. 8(7).76 ;

    ὑμῖν οὐ παρασχήσει ἀμύνασθαι Th.6.86

     ;

    σωφρονεῖν παρεῖχέ σοι E.El. 1080

     : neut. part. used abs., παρέχον it being in one's power, since one can, like ἐξόν, παρόν, παρέχον [ὑμῖν] ἄρχειν Hdt.5.49 ; also εὖ, καλῶς παρασχόν, Th.1.120, 5.14 ; κάλλιον π. ib.60.
    IV produce a person on demand,

    ἐς τὸ κοινόν X.HG7.4.38

     ; εἰς τὴν βουλήν, εἰς ἀγοράν (leg. αὔριον) , εἰς κρίσιν, Lys.13.23, 23.9, Aeschin.2.117, cf. PHib. 1.168 (iii B.C.), etc.
    V with a predic. added, make so and so, τὴν διέξοδόν οἱ ἀσφαλέα π. Hdt.3.4 ;

    π. τινὰς βελτίους And.1.136

    , cf. Pl.Phdr. 274e, 277a : with part.,

    π. ξυμμάχους τὰς σπονδὰς δεχομένους Th.5.35

    , cf. X.Oec. 21.4 ; κοινὴν τὴν πόλιν π. offer it as a common resort, Isoc.4.52 ; γῆν ἄσυλον καὶ δόμους ἐχεγγύους π. E.Med. 388, etc.
    B [voice] Med. παρέχομαι, [tense] fut.

    - έξομαι Antipho 5.20

    , Lys.23.8, etc.; also

    παρασχήσομαι Antipho 5.24

    , Lys.9.8 : [tense] aor. 2

    παρεσχόμην Is.3.18

    , 19 : [tense] pf. [voice] Pass. (in med. sense)

    παρέσχημαι X.An.7.6.11

    , D.27.49, 36.35 : freq. used much like [voice] Act., without any reflex. sense:
    1 supply of oneself or from one's own means,

    νέας Hdt.6.8

    ,15,al. ;

    δαπάνην οἰκηΐην Id.8.17

     ; π. ὅπλα furnish a suit of armour, IG12.22.11, Th. 8.97 ; οἱ τὰ τιμήματα παρεχόμενοι the tax- paying citizens, Arist.Ath. 39.6 ; μηδεμίαν δύναμιν π. εἰς τὴν στρατιάν supply no contingent of one's own to.., X.An.6.2.10 ; freq. with

    ἑαυτόν, εὔνουν καὶ πρόθυμον ἑαυτὸν παρέχεται SIG333.11

     (Samos, iv/iii B.C.), cf. 620.6 (Tenos, ii B.C.), etc.
    2 of natural objects, furnish, present, exhibit, [ ποταμὸς] κροκοδείλους π. Hdt.4.44 ; π. λίμνην ὁ Πόντος.. οὐ πολλῷ τεῳ ἐλάσσω ἑωυτοῦ ib.86, cf. 46, Pl.Phd. 81d.
    4 of incorporeal things, display on one's own part,

    πᾶσαν προθυμίην Id.7.6

    , cf. X.An.7.6.11 ;

    πᾶν τὸ πρόθυμον Th.4.85

    , cf. 61 ;

    εὔνοιαν D.18.10

     ; χρείας Decr. ap. D.18.84.
    II in Law, παρέχεσθαί τινας μάρτυρας, π. τεκμήρια, bring forward witnesses or proofs, Pl.Ap. 19d, Prm. 128b, Antipho 1.11, cf. 5.20,22, Lys.23.8, etc. ; π. ἐκμαρτυρίαν, μαρτυρίαν, Is. ll.cc.
    V render so and so for or towards oneself,

    θεὸν παρασχέσθαι εὐμενῆ E.Andr.55

     ;

    δυσμενεστέρους π. τοὺς ἀνθρώπους Pl.Prt. 317b

    , cf. R. 432a, Lg. 809d ; v. supr. A. V.
    VI Arith., make up, amount to, ἐνιαυτοὶ.. παρέχονται ἡμέρας .. Hdt.1.32, cf. X.Cyr. 6.1.28.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > παρέχω

  • 4 κατά

    κατά (Hom.+) prep. (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά beg., also LfgrE s.v. κατά 1346; with the gen. 74 times in NT; w. acc. 391 times in NT).
    A. w. the gen.
    ⓐ of location that is relatively lower, down from someth. (Hom. et al.; LXX; Ath. 1, 4 κ. κόρρης προπηλακίζειν=to smack on one side of the head) ὁρμᾶν κ. τοῦ κρημνοῦ rush down (from) the bank (cp. Polyb. 38, 16, 7 κ. τῶν κρημνῶν ῥίπτειν; Jos., Bell. 1, 313) Mt 8:32; Mk 5:13; Lk 8:33. κ. κεφαλῆς ἔχειν have someth. on one’s head (lit. hanging down fr. the head, as a veil. Cp. Plut., Mor. 200f ἐβάδιζε κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς ἔχων τὸ ἱμάτιον.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 499, 5 of a mummy ἔχων τάβλαν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου) 1 Cor 11:4.
    ⓑ of position relatively deep, into someth. (Od. 9, 330 κ. σπείους ‘into the depths of the cave’; Hdt. 7, 235; X., An. 7, 1, 30) ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία extreme (lit. ‘reaching down into the depths’; cp. Strabo 9, 3, 5 [419] ἄντρον κοῖλον κ. βάθους) or abysmal poverty 2 Cor 8:2. This may perh. be the mng. of πλήσσειν τινὰ κ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν strike someone deep into the eyes ApcPt 11:26 (cp. Demosth. 19, 197 ξαίνει κ. τοῦ νώτου; PPetr II, 18 [2b], 15 [246 B.C.] ἔτυπτεν αὐτὸν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου).—κ. γαστρός Just., D. 78, 3 for ἐν γαστρί Mt 1:18 (cp. Ath. 35, 2 τὸ κ. γαστρὸς ζῶον εἶναι).
    ⓒ extension in various directions within an area, throughout (so in Luke’s writings; Polyb. 3, 19, 7 κ. τῆς νήσου διεσπάρησαν; PGiss 48, 8 κ. κυριακῆς γῆς; Jos., Ant. 8, 297; SibOr 3, 222; 4, 24; 5, 305) γνωστὸν γενέσθαι καθʼ ὅλης Ἰόππης become known throughout all Joppa Ac 9:42. καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 9:31; 10:37; Lk 23:5. φήμη ἐξῆλθεν καθʼ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου 4:14.
    ② down upon, toward, against someone or someth, fig. ext. of 1.
    ⓐ w. verbs of swearing, to denote what one swears by (Thu. 5, 47, 8; Lysias 32, 13; Isaeus 7, 28; Demosth. 21, 119; 29, 26; SIG 526, 4ff; 685, 25; UPZ 110, 39 [164 B.C.]; BGU 248, 13; Jdth 1:12; Is 45:23; 2 Ch 36:13) by ἐξορκίζειν (q.v.) Mt 26:63. ὀμνύναι (q.v.) Hb 6:13, 16. ὁρκίζειν (q.v.) Hs 9, 10, 5. Sim. ἐρωτᾶν κ. τινος request, entreat by someone Hv 3, 2, 3.
    ⓑ in a hostile sense, against
    α. after verbs that express hostile action, etc. διχάζειν Mt 10:35. ἐπαίρεσθαι 2 Cor 10:5. ἰσχύειν Ac 19:16. κακοῦν 14:2. στρατεύεσθαι 1 Pt 2:11. φυσιοῦσθαι 1 Cor 4:6
    β. after words and expressions that designate hostile speech, esp. an accusation ἔχειν (τι) κ. τινος have or hold someth. against someone Rv 2:4, 14, 20. φέρειν J 18:29. ἐγκαλεῖν Ro 8:33. ἐντυγχάνειν τινὶ κ. τινος 11:2 (TestJob 17:5). κατηγορεῖν Lk 23:14. ποιεῖν κρίσιν Jd 15a. τὸ κ. ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον the bond that stands against us Col 2:14. ἐμφανίζειν Ac 24:1; 25:2. αἰτεῖσθαί τι 25:3, 15. αἱ κ. τινος αἰτίαι vs. 27. εἰπεῖν πονηρόν Mt 5:11 (cp. Soph., Phil. 65 κακὰ λέγειν κ. τινος. X., Hell. 1, 5, 2; Isocr., C. Nic. 13; Plut., Mor. 2a λέγειν κ.; SIG 1180, 1 λέγειν κ. τινος; Just., A I, 23, 3; 49, 6 κ. τῶν … ὁμολογούντων). λαλεῖν ῥήματα Ac 6:13; cp. Jd 15b (TestDan 4:3; JosAs 23:15). μαρτυρεῖν κ. τ. θεοῦ give testimony in contradiction to God 1 Cor 15:15. ζητεῖν μαρτυρίαν κ. τινος testimony against someone Mk 14:55. ψευδομαρτυρεῖν 14:56f. ψευδομαρτυρία Mt 26:59. γογγύζειν 20:11. στενάζειν Js 5:9. διδάσκειν Ac 21:28. συμβούλιον διδόναι (ποιεῖν v.l.) Mk 3:6; ς. λαβεῖν Mt 27:1. ψεύδεσθαι Js 3:14 (Lysias 22, 7; X., Ap. 13; Ath. 35, 1 καθʼ ἡμῶν … κατεψεύσατο).
    γ. after expressions that designate such a position or state of mind in a different way εἶναι κ. τινος be against someone (opp. ὑπέρ) Mk 9:40 (WNestle, ZNW 13, 1912, 84–87; AFridrichsen, ibid., 273–80); Ro 8:31; (opp. μετά) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23. δύνασθαί τι κ. τινος be able to do someth. against someone 2 Cor 13:8. ἔχειν τι κ. τινος have someth. against someone (in one’s heart) Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; Hs 9, 24, 2; cp. ibid. 23, 2, where the acc. is to be supplied. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. ἐπιθυμεῖν Gal 5:17. μερίζεσθαι καθʼ ἑαυτῆς Mt 12:25. Cp. 1 Cl 39:4 (Job 4:18).—κατά prob. means against also in ἔβαλεν κατʼ αὐτῆς ἄνεμος Ac 27:14. ἐτελείωσαν κ. τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα they completed the full measure of sins against their own head GPt 5:17.
    B. w. acc. (so in the NT 399 times [besides καθʼ εἷς and κατὰ εἷς])
    ⓐ of extension in space, along, over, through, in, upon (Hom. et al.; OGI 90, 7 ἐκ τῶν κ. τ. χώραν ἱερῶν; PHib 82, 19; PTebt 5, 188; LXX; Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 5) Ac 24:12. καθʼ ὅλην τ. πόλιν throughout the city Lk 8:39 (cp. Diod S 4, 10, 6 καθʼ ὅλην τὴν Ἐλλάδα). ἐγένετο λιμὸς κ. τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην 15:14. κ. τὰς κώμας 9:6. κ. πόλεις καὶ κώμας 13:22 (Appian., Maced. 9 §1 and 4 κ. πόλεις; Just., A I, 67, 3 κ. πόλεις ἢ ἀγρούς).—κ. τόπους in place after place Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8; Lk 21:11 (Theophr., περὶ σημ. 1, 4 p. 389 W.; Cat. Cod. Astr. III 28, 11 ἐν μέρει τ. ἀνατολῆς κ. τόπους, VIII/3, 186, 1 λιμὸς καὶ λοιμὸς καὶ σφαγαὶ κ. τόπους). οἱ ὄντες κ. τὴν Ἰουδαίαν those throughout Judea or living in Judea Ac 11:1. διασπαρῆναι κ. τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας be scattered over the regions of Judea 8:1. κ. τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν in the congregation there 13:1. τοῖς κ. τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν καὶ Συρίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν ἀδελφοῖς 15:23. τοὺς κ. τὰ ἔθνη Ἰουδαίους the Judeans (dispersed) throughout the nations 21:21. τοῖς κ. τὸν νόμον γεγραμμένοις throughout the law = in the law 24:14b. κ. τὴν ὁδόν along or on the way (Lucian, Catapl. 4; Jos., Ant. 8, 404) Lk 10:4; Ac 25:3; 26:13. τὸ κ. Κιλικίαν καὶ Παμφυλίαν πέλαγος the sea along the coast of Cilicia and Pamphylia 27:5; but the geographical designation τὰ μέρη τ. Λιβύης τῆς κ. Κυρήνην 2:10 prob. belongs to b: the parts of Libya toward Cyrene.
    ⓑ of extension toward, toward, to, up to ἐλθεῖν (γίνεσθαι v.l.) κ. τὸν τόπον come up to the place (Jos., Vi. 283) Lk 10:32. ἐλθόντες κ. τὴν Μυσίαν to Mysia Ac 16:7; cp. 27:7. πορεύεσθαι κ. μεσημβρίαν (s. μεσημβρία 2) toward the south 8:26 (cp. Jos., Bell. 5, 505). κ. σκοπὸν διώκειν run (over the course) toward the goal Phil 3:14. λιμὴν βλέπων κ. λίβα καὶ κ. χῶρον a harbor open to the southwest and northwest Ac 27:12 (s. βλέπω 8).—κ. πρόσωπον to the face (cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 205) Gal 2:11. ἔχειν τινὰ κ. πρόσωπον meet someone face to face (Thieme 19 has reff. for the use of κατὰ πρόσωπον as a legal formula) Ac 25:16. κ. πρόσωπον ταπεινός humble when personally present 2 Cor 10:1. κ. πρόσωπόν τινος in the presence of someone Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13. τὰ κ. πρόσωπον what lies before one’s eyes, i.e. is obvious 2 Cor 10:7. κ. ὀφθαλμοὺς προγράφειν portray before one’s eyes Gal 3:1.
    ⓒ of isolation or separateness, by (Thu. 1, 138, 6 οἱ καθʼ ἑαυτοὺς Ἕλληνες ‘the Greeks by themselves’; Polyb. 1, 24, 4; 5, 78, 3; 11, 17, 6; Diod S 13, 72, 8; Gen 30:40; 43:32; 2 Macc 13:13; Philo, Migr. Abr. 87; 90; Just., D. 4, 5 αὐτὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν γενομένη; Tat. 13, 1 ἡ ψυχὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν; Ath. 15, 2 ὁ πηλὸς καθʼ ἑαυτόν) ἔχειν τι καθʼ ἑαυτόν keep someth. to oneself Ro 14:22 (cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 255; Heliod. 7, 16, 1). καθʼ ἑαυτὸν μένειν live by oneself of the private dwelling of Paul in Rome Ac 28:16. πίστις νεκρὰ καθʼ ἑαυτήν faith by itself is dead Js 2:17 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 3, 43 τὸ σῶμα καθʼ αὑτὸ νεκρόν ἐστιν). ἡ κατʼ οἶκον ἐκκλησία the congregation in the house Ro 16:5; 1 Cor 16:19. κατʼ ἰδίαν s. ἴδιος 5. κ. μόνας (Thu. 1, 32, 5; Menand., Epitr. 988 S. [658 Kö.], Fgm. 146 Kö. [158 Kock]; Polyb. 4, 15, 11; Diod S 4, 51, 16; BGU 813, 15 [s. APF 2, 1903, 97]; LXX) alone, by oneself Mk 4:10; Lk 9:18; Hm 11:8 (here, as well as BGU loc. cit. and LXX, written as one word καταμόνας).
    ⓓ of places viewed serially, distributive use w. acc., x by x (Arrian., Anab. 4, 21, 10 κ. σκηνήν=tent by tent) or from x to x: κατʼ οἶκον from house to house (PLond III, 904, 20 p. 125 [104 A.D.] ἡ κατʼ οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή) Ac 2:46b; 5:42 (both in ref. to various house assemblies or congregations; w. less probability NRSV ‘at home’); cp. 20:20. Likew. the pl. κ. τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος 8:3. κ. τὰς συναγωγάς 22:19. κ. πόλιν (Jos., Ant. 6, 73) from city to city IRo 9:3, but in every (single) city Ac 15:21; 20:23; Tit 1:5. Also κ. πόλιν πᾶσαν (cp. Herodian 1, 14, 9) Ac 15:36; κ. πᾶσαν πόλιν 20:23 D. κ. πόλιν καὶ κώμην Lk 8:1; cp. vs. 4.
    ② marker of temporal aspect (Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX, apolog.)
    ⓐ in definite indications of time: at, on, during (Hdt. 8, 17; Polemon Soph. B 43 Reader κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν ‘in the course of that day’) κατʼ ἀρχάς in the beginning (cp. ἀρχή 1b) Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26). κ. τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ in the day of trial 3:8 (Ps 94:8.—Cp. Antig. Car. 173 κ. τὸν σπόρου καιρόν). νεκροῦ … ἀνάστασιν κατʼ αὐτὸν γεγονυῖαν ἱστορεῖ (Papias) reports that a resurrection from the dead occurred in his time Papias (2, 9; so, with personal names, Hdt.; Just., D. 23, 1 τοῦ θεοῦ … τοῦ κ. τὸν Ἐνώχ; Tat. 31, 2 Θεαγένης … κ. Καμβύσην γεγονώς). Of the future: κ. τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον at that time, then Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10). Of the past: κ. ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρόν at that time, then (2 Macc 3:5; TestJos 12:1; Jos., Ant. 8, 266; cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο τοῦ καιροῦ Konon: 26 Fgm. 3 p. 191, 25 Jac.; Just., A I, 17, 2; 26, 3 al.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. κ. καιρόν at that time, then Ro 5:6 (Just., D. 132, 1; cp. OGI 90, 28 καθʼ ὸ̔ν καιρόν), unless καιρός here means the right time (s. καιρός 1b end). κατʼ ὄναρ (as καθʼ ὕπνον Gen 20:6; Just., D 60, 5 κ. τοὺς ὕπνους) during a dream, in a dream Mt 1:20; 2:12 (s. s.v. ὄναρ for ins).
    ⓑ with indefinite indications of time: toward, about κ. τὸ μεσονύκτιον about midnight Ac 16:25; cp. 27:27.—8:26 (s. μεσημβρία 1).
    ⓒ distributively (cp. 1d): x period by x period: κατʼ ἔτος every year (s. ἔτος) Lk 2:41. Also κατʼ ἐνιαυτόν (s. ἐνιαυτός 1) Hb 9:25; 10:1, 3. καθʼ ἡμέραν daily, every day (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Mt 26:55; Mk 14:49; Lk 16:19; 22:53; Ac 2:46f; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11; 19:9; 1 Cor 15:31; Hb 7:27; 10:11. Also τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Lk 11:3; 19:47; Ac 17:11 v.l. ἡ ἐπίστασις ἡ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἐπίστασις) 2 Cor 11:28. κ. πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day (Jos., Ant. 6, 49) Ac 17:7. Also καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Hb 3:13. κ. μίαν σαββάτου on the first day of every week 1 Cor 16:2. κ. πᾶν σάββατον every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21b; 18:4. κ. μῆνα ἕκαστον each month Rv 22:2 (κ. μῆνα as SIG 153, 65; POxy 275, 18; 2 Macc 6:7). κ. ἑορτήν at each festival Mt 27:15; Mk 15:6.
    ③ marker of division of a greater whole into individual parts, at a time, in detail, distributive use apart from indications of place (s. above 1d) and time (s. 2c)
    ⓐ w. numerals: κ. δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς two or, at the most, three at a time (i.e. in any one meeting, cp. ἀνὰ μέρος) 1 Cor 14:27 (Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 42 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς; Jos., Ant. 3, 142 κ. ἕξ; 5, 172 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς). καθʼ ἕνα (on this and the foll. s. εἷς 5e) singly, one after the other vs. 31. κ. ἕνα λίθον each individual stone Hs 9, 3, 5; καθʼ ἕνα λίθον 9, 6, 3. κ. ἓν ἕκαστον one by one, in detail Ac 21:19; 1 Cl 32:1 (Ath. 28, 4 καθʼ ἕκαστον). εἷς καθʼ εἷς Mk 14:19; J 8:9; cp. Ro 12:5 (B-D-F §305; Rob. 460). κ. ἑκατὸν καὶ κ. πεντήκοντα in hundreds and in fifties Mk 6:40.
    ⓑ περί τινος λέγειν κ. μέρος speak of someth. in detail Hb 9:5 (s. μέρος 1c). κατʼ ὄνομα (each one) by name (ἀσπάζομαι … τοὺς ἐνοίκους πάντες κα[τʼ] ὄνομα PTebt [III A.D.] 422, 11–16; Jos., Vi. 86) J 10:3; 3J 15 (cp. BGU 27, 18); ISm 13:2.
    ④ marker of intention or goal, for the purpose of, for, to (Thu. 6, 31, 1 κ. θέαν ἥκειν=to look at something; cp. Sb 7263, 6 [254 B.C.]; X., An. 3, 5, 2 καθʼ ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι; Arrian, Anab. 1, 17, 12; 4, 5, 1; 21, 9; 6, 17, 6; 26, 2; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 2, 29; Anton. Lib., Fab. 24, 1 Δημήτηρ ἐπῄει γῆν ἅπασαν κ. ζήτησιν τῆς θυγατρός; 38; Jdth 11:19) κ. τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῶν Ἰουδαίων for the Jewish ceremonial purification J 2:6. κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω to my shame 2 Cor 11:21 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 268 κ. τιμὴν τ. θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν). ἀπόστολος … κ. πίστιν … καὶ ἐπίγνωσιν an apostle … for the faith … and the knowledge Tit 1:1 (but the mng. ‘in accordance with’ is also prob.).
    ⑤ marker of norm of similarity or homogeneity, according to, in accordance with, in conformity with, according to
    ⓐ to introduce the norm which governs someth.
    α. the norm of the law, etc. (OGI 56, 33; Mitt-Wilck., I/2, 352, 11 κ. τὰ κελευσθέντα [as Just., D. 78, 7]; POxy 37 II, 8) κ. τὸν νόμον (Jos., Ant. 14, 173; 15, 51; Just., D. 10, 1 al.; Ath. 31, 1; κ. τοὺς νόμους Ἀρεοπαγείτης, letter of MAurelius: ZPE 8, ’71, 169, ln. 27) Lk 2:22; J 18:31; 19:7; Hb 7:5. τὰ κ. τ. νόμον what is to be done according to the law Lk 2:39 (cp. EpArist 32). κ. τὸ ὡρισμένον in accordance w. what has been determined 22:22. Cp. 1:9; 2:24, 27, 42; Ac 17:2; 22:3. κ. τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου Ro 2:16; 16:25a; 2 Ti 2:8. κ. τὸ εἰρημένον Ro 4:18 (cp. Ath. 28, 1 κ. τὰ προειρημένα). κ. τὰς γραφάς (Just., D. 82, 4; cp. Paus. 6, 21, 10 κ. τὰ ἔπη=according to the epic poems; Just., A I, 32, 14 κ. τὸ λόγιον, D. 67, 1 κ. τὴν προφητείαν ταύτην) 1 Cor 15:3; cp. Js 2:8. κ. τὴν παράδοσιν Mk 7:5 (Tat. 39, 1 κ. τὴν Ἑλλήνων παράδοσιν).—κ. λόγον as one wishes (exx. in Dssm., B 209 [not in BS]; also PEleph 13, 1; 3 Macc 3:14) Ac 18:14 (though 5bβ below is also prob.).—It can also stand simply w. the acc. of the pers. according to whose will, pleasure, or manner someth. occurs κ. θεόν (cp. Socrat., Ep. 14, 5 κ. θεόν; 26, 2; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 1 Jac. and Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 84 §352 κ. δαίμονα; Jos., Ant. 4, 143 ὁ κ. τοῦτον[=θεόν] βίος; Just., D. 5, 1 κ. τινας … Πλατωνικούς; Tat. 1, 3 κ. … τὸν κωμικόν) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9–11; κ. Χριστὸν Ἰ. Ro 15:5. κ. κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. Cp. 1 Pt 1:15. κ. τ. Ἕλληνας in the manner of the Greeks, i.e. polytheists PtK 2, p. 14, 1; 7. κ. Ἰουδαίους ln. 25.
    β. the norm according to which a judgment is rendered, or rewards or punishments are given ἀποδοῦναι τινι κ. τ. πρᾶξιν or ἔργα αὐτοῦ (Ps 61:13; Pr 24:12; Just., A I, 12, 1; 17, 4 al.; κατʼ ἀξίαν τῶν πράξεων) Mt 16:27; Ro 2:6; 2 Ti 4:14; Rv 2:23. μισθὸν λήμψεται κ. τ. ἴδιον κόπον 1 Cor 3:8. κρίνειν κ. τι J 7:24; 8:15; 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Ro 2:2.
    γ. of a standard of any other kind κ. τ. χρόνον ὸ̔ν ἠκρίβωσεν in accordance w. the time which he had ascertained Mt 2:16. κ. τ. πίστιν ὑμῶν acc. to your faith 9:29. κ. τ. δύναμιν acc. to his capability 25:15 (Just., D. 139, 4; Tat. 12, 3; cp. Just., A II, 13, 6 κ. δύναμιν). Cp. Lk 1:38; 2:29; Ro 8:4; 10:2; Eph 4:7. ἀνὴρ κ. τ. καρδίαν μου Ac 13:22 (καρδία 1bε).
    δ. Oft. the norm is at the same time the reason, so that in accordance with and because of are merged: οἱ κ. πρόθεσιν κλητοί Ro 8:28. κατʼ ἐπιταγὴν θεοῦ 16:26; 1 Ti 1:1; Tit 1:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Eph 3:3 (Just., D. 78, 2). οἱ καθʼ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ Ro 2:7. κατʼ ἐκλογήν 11:5 (Just., D. 49, 1). Cp. κ. τὴν βουλήν Eph 1:11 (Just., A I, 63, 16 al.); 2 Th 2:9; Hb 7:16. κ. τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο; by what shall I know this? (cp. Gen 15:8) Lk 1:18.—Instead of ‘in accordance w.’ κ. can mean simply because of, as a result of, on the basis of (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 219 D.: κ. τοὺς νόμους; Jos., Ant. 1, 259; 278; Just., A I, 54, 1 κατʼ ἐνέργειαν τῶν φαύλων δαιμόνων; Ath. 7, 1 κ. συμπάθειαν τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ πνοῆς; 32, 1 κ. χρησμόν). κ. πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any and every reason (αἰτία 1) Mt 19:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Gal 2:2. Cp. Ro 2:5; 1 Cor 12:8 (κ. τ. πνεῦμα = διὰ τοῦ πν.); Eph 1:5; 4:22b; Phil 4:11; 1 Ti 5:21; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 3:5; κ. ἀνάγκην Phlm 14 (Ar. 1, 2; 4, 2 al.; Just., A I, 30, 1; 61, 10; Ath. 24, 2); IPol 1:3. ὁ κ. τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 Pt 1:3.—καθʼ ὅσον (Thu. 4, 18, 4) in so far as, inasmuch as Hb 3:3. καθʼ ὅσον …, κ. τοσοῦτο in so far as …, just so far (Lysias 31, 8; Galen, De Dignosc. Puls. 3, 2, VIII 892 K.) 7:20, 22.
    ⓑ as a periphrasis to express equality, similarity, or example in accordance with, just as, similar(ly) to (TestJob 32:6 τίς γὰρ κ. σε ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου; Tat. 25, 1 κ. … τὸν Πρωτέα like Proteus; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 50: sheep are not burden-bearers κ. τοὺς ὄνους=as donkeys are).
    α. κ. τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε do not do as they do Mt 23:3. κ. Ἰσαάκ just as Isaac Gal 4:28. κ. θεὸν κτισθείς Eph 4:24 (Synes., Prov. 2, 2 p. 118c κ. θεόν=just as a god). Cp. Col 3:10. κ. τὸν τύπον Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40; Mel., P. 58, 424 [νόμον v.l.]). Cp. 5:6 (Ps 109:4); 8:9 (Jer 38: 32); Js 3:9.—κ. τὰ αὐτά in (just) the same way (OGI 56, 66; PEleph 2, 6; 1 Macc 8:27; 12:2; Just., D. 1, 2; 3, 5; 113, 3) Lk 6:23, 26; 17:30; Dg 3:1. On the other hand, the sing. κ. τὸ αὐτό Ac 14:1 means together (marriage contract PEleph 1, 5 [IV B.C.] εἶναι ἡμᾶς κ. ταὐτό; 1 Km 11:11). καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον just as (2 Macc 6:20; 4 Macc 14:17) Ac 15:11; 27:25. καθʼ ὅσον …, οὕτως (just) as …, so Hb 9:27. κ. πάντα τρόπον in every way (PSI 520, 16 [250 B.C.]; PCairZen 631, 2; 3 Macc 3:24) Ro 3:2. κ. μηδένα τρόπον (PMagd 14, 9 [221 B.C.]; PRein 7, 31; 3 Macc 4:13; 4 Macc 4:24; Just., D. 35, 7; s. Reader, Polemo 262) 2 Th 2:3. Cp. Johannessohn, Kasus, 1910, 82. κατά w. acc. serves in general
    β. to indicate the nature, kind, peculiarity or characteristics of a thing (freq. as a periphrasis for the adv.; e.g. Antiochus of Syracuse [V B.C.]: 555 Fgm. 12 Jac. κ. μῖσος=out of hate, filled with hate) κατʼ ἐξουσίαν with authority or power Mk 1:27. κ. συγκυρίαν by chance Lk 10:31. κ. ἄγνοιαν without knowing Ac 3:17 (s. ἄγνοια 2a). κ. ἄνθρωπον 1 Cor 3:3 al. (s. Straub 15; Aeschyl., Th. 425; ἄνθρωπος 2b). κ. κράτος powerfully, Ac 19:20 (κράτος 1a). κ. λόγον reasonably, rightly (Pla.; Polyb. 1, 62, 4; 5; 5, 110, 10; Jos., Ant. 13, 195; PYale 42, 24 [12 Jan., 229 B.C.]) 18:14 (but s. above 5aα). λέγειν τι κ. συγγνώμην οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν say someth. as a concession, not as a command 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. κ. τάξιν in (an) order(ly manner) 1 Cor 14:40 (τάξις 2). κατʼ ὀφθαλμοδουλίαν with eye-service Eph 6:6. μηδὲν κατʼ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κ. κενοδοξίαν Phil 2:3. κ. ζῆλος zealously 3:6a, unless this pass. belongs under 6 below, in its entirety. κ. σάρκα on the physical plane Ro 8:12f; 2 Cor 1:17; also 5:16ab, if here κ. ς. belongs w. οἴδαμεν or ἐγνώκαμεν (as Bachmann, JWeiss, H-D Wendland, Sickenberger take it; s. 7a below). καθʼ ὑπερβολήν (PTebt 42, 5f [c. 114 B.C.] ἠδικημένος καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὸ, Ἁρμιύσιος; 4 Macc 3:18) beyond measure, beyond comparison Ro 7:13; 1 Cor 12:31; 2 Cor 4:17. καθʼ ὁμοιότητα (Aristot.; Gen 1:12; Philo, Fug. 51; Tat. 12, 4 κ. τὸ ὅμοιον αὐτῇ) in a similar manner Hb 4:15b. κ. μικρόν in brief B 1:5 (μικρός 1eγ).
    ⑥ denoting relationship to someth., with respect to, in relation to κ. σάρκα w. respect to the flesh, physically of human descent Ro 1:3; 4:1; 9:3, 5 (Ar. 15, 7 κ. σάρκα … κ. ψυχήν; Just., D. 43, 7 ἐν τῷ γένει τῷ κ. σάρκα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ al.). κ. τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 7:22 (cp. POxy 904, 6 πληγαῖς κατακοπτόμενον κ. τὸ σῶμα). Cp. Ro 1:4; 11:28; Phil 3:5, 6b (for vs. 6a s. 5bβ above); Hb 9:9b. τὰ κ. τινα (Hdt. 7, 148; Diod S 1, 10, 73; Aelian, VH 2, 20; PEleph 13, 3; POxy 120, 14; Tob 10:9; 1 Esdr 9:17; 2 Macc 3:40; 9:3 al.) someone’s case, circumstances Ac 24:22 (cp. PEleph 13, 3 τὰ κ. σε; Just., A I, 61, 13 τὰ κ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν πάντα, D. 102, 2 τὰ κ. αὐτόν; Ath. 24, 4 τὸ κ. τοὺς ἀγγέλους); 25:14; Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. κ. πάντα in all respects (since Thu. 4, 81, 3; Sb 4324, 3; 5761, 22; SIG 834, 7; Gen 24:1; Wsd 19:22; 2 Macc 1:17; 3 Macc 5:42; JosAs 1:7; Just., A II, 4, 4, D. 35, 8 al.); Ac 17:22; Col 3:20, 22a; Hb 2:17 (Artem. 1, 13 αὐτῷ ὅμοιον κ. π.); 4:15a.
    ⑦ Somet. the κατά phrase, which would sound cumbersome in the rendering ‘such-and-such’, ‘in line with’, or ‘in accordance with’, is best rendered as an adj., a possessive pron., or with a genitival construction to express the perspective from which something is perceived or to be understood. In translation it thus functions as
    ⓐ an adj. (Synes., Kingdom 4 p. 4d τὰ κατʼ ἀρετὴν ἔργα i.e. the deeds that are commensurate with that which is exceptional = virtuous deeds; PHib 27, 42 ταῖς κ. σελήνην ἡμέραις; 4 Macc 5:18 κ. ἀλήθειαν=ἀληθής; Just., A I, 2, 1 τοὺς κ. ἀλήθειαν εὐσεβεῖς; Tat. 26, 2 τῆς κ. ἀλήθειαν σοφίας) οἱ κ. φύσιν κλάδοι the natural branches Ro 11:21. ἡ κατʼ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Tit 1:1b. οἱ κ. σάρκα κύριοι the earthly masters (in wordplay, anticipating the κύριος who is in the heavens, vs. 9) Eph 6:5. Cp. 2 Cor 5:16b, in case (s. 5bβ above) κ. ς. belongs w. Χριστόν (as the majority, incl. Ltzm., take it): a physical Christ, a Christ in the flesh, in his earthly relationships (σάρξ 5). Correspondingly in vs. 16a κ. ς. would be taken w. οὐδένα: no one simply as a physical being.—JMartyn, JKnox Festschr., ’67, 269–87.
    ⓑ a possessive pron., but with limiting force (Demosth. 2, 27 τὰ καθʼ ὑμᾶς ἐλλείμματα [i.e. in contrast to the activities of others: ‘your own’]; Aelian, VH 2, 42 ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ἀρετή; 3, 36; OGI 168, 17 παραγεγονότες εἰς τοὺς καθʼ ὑμᾶς τόπους; SIG 646, 6; 807, 15 al.; UPZ 20, 9 [II B.C.] ἐπὶ τῆς καθʼ ἡμᾶς λειτουργίας; PTebt 24, 64; 2 Macc 4:21; Tat. 42, 1 τίς ὁ θεὸς καὶ τίς ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ποίησις; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7 ἡ καθʼ ἡμᾶς φιλοσοφία) τῶν καθʼ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν τινες some of your (own) poets Ac 17:28. ἡ καθʼ ὑμᾶς πίστις Eph 1:15. ὁ καθʼ ὑμᾶς νόμος Ac 18:15. τὸ κατʼ ἐμὲ πρόθυμον my eagerness Ro 1:15.
    ⓒ a gen. w. a noun (Polyb. 3, 113, 1 ἡ κ. τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατολή; 2, 48, 2; 3, 8, 1 al.; Diod S 14, 12 ἡ κ. τὸν τύραννον ὠμότης; Dionys. Hal. 2, 1; SIG 873, 5 τῆς κ. τ. μυστήρια τελετῆς; 569, 22; 783, 20; PTebt 5, 25; PLond III, 1164k, 20 p. 167 [212 A.D.] ὑπὸ τοῦ κ. πατέρα μου ἀνεψιοῦ) τὰ κ. Ἰουδαίους ἔθη the customs of the Judeans Ac 26:3 (Tat. 12, 5 τῇ κ. Βαβυλωνίους προγνωστικῇ; 34, 2 ἡ κ. τὸν Ἀριστόδημον πλαστική). Cp. 27:2. ἡ κ. πίστιν δικαιοσύνη the righteousness of faith Hb 11:7. ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις purpose of election Ro 9:11.—Here also belong the titles of the gospels εὐαγγέλιον κατὰ Ματθαῖον etc., where κατά is likew. periphrasis for a gen. (cp. JLydus, De Mag. 3, 46 p. 136, 10 Wünsch τῆς κ. Λουκανὸν συγγραφῆς; Herodian 2, 9, 4 of an autobiography ἐν τῷ καθʼ αὑτὸν βίῳ; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 18 τ. καθʼ αὐτὸν ἱστορίαν; 2 Macc 2:13. Cp. B-D-F §163; 224, 2; Zahn, Einleitung §49; BBacon, Why ‘According to Mt’? Exp., 8th ser., 16, 1920, 289–310).—On the periphrasis of the gen. by κατά s. Rudberg (ἀνά beg.) w. many exx. fr. Pla. on. But it occurs as early as Thu. 6, 16, 5 ἐν τῷ κατʼ αὐτοὺς βίῳ.—M-M. DELG. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κατά

  • 5 λέγω

    λέγω (Hom.+; on the mng. of the word ADebrunner, TW IV 71–73) impf. ἔλεγον (3 pl. ἔλεγαν s. B-D-F §82 app.; Mlt-H. 194; KBuresch, RhM 46, 1891, 224). Only pres. and impf. are in use; the other tenses are supplied by εἶπον (q.v., also B-D-F §101 p. 46; Mlt-H. 247), but the foll. pass. forms occur: fut. 3 sg. λεχθήσεται; aor. ptc. fem. sg. λεχθεῖσα (SyrBar 14:1), neut. pl. τὰ λεχθέντα (Jos. 24, 27; Esth 1:18; Papias, Just.), 3 sg. ἐλέχθη and pl. ἐλέχθησαν; pf. 3 sg. λέλεκται; plupf. ἐλέλεκτο; pf. ptc. λελεγμένος (all Just.; B-D-F §101) ‘say’ (beginning w. Hes. [Hom. uses the word in the senses ‘gather, collect’, as Il. 11, 755 al., and mid. ‘select’, as Il. 21, 27, and esp. of stories that one elects to ‘tell over’ or ‘recount’, as Od. 14, 197] and more freq. in Pind.; the usual word since the Attic writers; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.).
    ① to express oneself orally or in written form, utter in words, say, tell, give expression to, the gener. sense (not in Hom., for this εἶπον, ἐν[ν]έπω, et al.)
    ⓐ w. an indication of what is said
    α. in the acc. ταύτην τ. παραβολήν Lk 13:6. (τὴν) ἀλήθειαν (Teles p. 4, 14; TestAbr A 16 p. 97, 27 [Stone p. 42]) J 8:45f; Ro 9:1; 1 Ti 2:7. ἀληθῆ (cp. Herodian 4, 14, 4) J 19:35. παροιμίαν οὐδεμίαν 16:29. τὶ καινότερον Ac 17:21 (w. ἀκούω as Pla., Prot. 310a; Dio Chrys. 3, 28; 4, 37). τί λέγουσιν what they say Mt 21:16; cp. Lk 18:6; 1 Cor 14:16. τί λέγω; what shall I say? Hb 11:32. ὸ̔ λέγει Lk 9:33; cp. 2 Ti 2:7; Phlm 21. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7; AcPlCor 1:9. ταῦτα (τοῦτο) λ. (Jos., Vi. 291) Lk 9:34; 11:45b; 13:17; J 2:22; τοιαῦτα λ. Hb 11:14. τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν be in agreement (not only in words: Thu. 4, 20, 4; 5, 31, 6; Polyb. 2, 62, 4; 5, 104, 1; Jos., Ant. 18, 375; 378) 1 Cor 1:10.—Also τινί τι tell someone someth. παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς Lk 18:1. μυστήριον ὑμῖν 1 Cor 15:51. τ. ἀλήθειαν ὑμῖν J 16:7. ὸ̔ λέγω ὑμῖν Mt 10:27. μηδενὶ λ. τοῦτο Lk 9:21. οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσιν they say nothing to him J 7:26. ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 2 Th 2:5.—τὶ πρός τινα (Pla, Gorg. 465a) παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτούς Lk 5:36; cp. 14:7; 20:9.—24:10; 11:53 v.l. W. double acc. ἀδύνατα ταῦτα εἴρηκας Hm 11:19.
    β. by direct discourse or direct question foll., mostly abs. (extremely freq.) Mt 9:34; 12:44; Mk 3:30; Lk 5:39; J 1:29, 36; 1 Cor l2:3; Js 4:13. Also oft. introduced by recitative ὅτι Mt 9:18; Mk 1:15; 2:12; 3:21f; 5:28; 6:14f (on the textual problem s. FNeirynck, ETL 65, ’89, 110–18), 35; 7:20; Lk 1:24; 4:41; 17:10; 21:8 v.l.; J 6:14; 7:12; 8:33; Ac 2:13; 11:3 and oft.—καὶ ἔλεγεν Mk 4:21, 24, 26, 30 may = he used to say (so that they might memorize): WEssame, ET 77, ’66, 121.
    γ. by indirect discourse or indirect question foll.; abs. Mt 21:27; Mk 11:33c; Lk 20:8.—Introduced by ὅτι (Diod S 11, 4, 3; 11, 6, 2; 14, 4, 3; Petosiris, Fgm. 14c; Jos., Bell. 4, 543) Lk 22:70; Ac 20:23.—In acc. w. inf. τίνα λέγουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι εἶναι τ. υἱὸν τ. ἀνθρώπου; Mt 16:13; cp. vs. 15; Lk 9:20; 11:18; 23:2b; 24:23b; J 12:29a; Ac 4:32; 8:9; 17:7.—W. the inf. only Lk 24:23a; Js 2:14; 1J 2:6, 9.
    ⓑ w. indication of the pers. or thing about which someth. is said, or that is meant by someth.
    α. by a prep. περί τινος (Soph., Thu. et al.) οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἔγνωσαν ὅτι περὶ αὐτῶν λέγει the Pharisees perceived that he was talking about them Mt 21:45. λέγει περὶ αὐτοῦ he said concerning him J 1:47; cp. 2:21; 11:13; 13:18, 22. εἴς τινα (Eur., Med. 453; X., Mem. 1, 5, 1) Ac 2:25; Eph 5:32. ἐπί τινα Hb 7:13. πρός τινα Lk 12:41; Hb 1:7.
    β. by the acc. alone mean someone or someth. (Demosth. 18, 88; Diod S 15, 23, 5; Phalaris, Ep. 142, 1 ἣν λέγω; Ael. Aristid. 48, 35 K.=24 p. 474 D.: τὸν Φιλάδελφον λέγων; Aelian, NA 8, 3 ὸ̔ δὲ λέγω, τοιοῦτόν ἐστιν, VH 3, 36; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; 10, 2; 2 Macc 14:7; Jos., Ant. 6, 86; TestSol 4:6 D τὸν δύστηνον λέγω γέροντα; Just., D. 130, 2 μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ, λέγω Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ …) τ. ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὸ̔ν λέγετε this man whom you mean Mk 14:71. ἔλεγεν τὸν Ἰούδαν J 6:71. συνείδησιν λέγω οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ I mean not your own conscience 1 Cor 10:29. τοῦτο δὲ λέγω but this is what I mean Gal 3:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:12a (Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 3, 12; 2, 11, 1 λέγω δέ … but I mean).—Mt 26:70; Mk 14:68; Lk 22:60. Cp. 4 end.
    γ. w. an indication of the one to whom someth. is said (on the synoptics and Ac s. WLarfeld, Die ntl. Ev. 1925, 237f); mostly in dat. (Aeschyl., Ag. 103; Herodas 4, 42 σοί; POxy 413, 99; s. also 1aα above) Mt 8:7; Mk 2:8, 17f; Lk 3:7; 5:24; J 1:39, 41, 43 and oft.—πρός τινα (Epict. 2, 17, 34 πρὸς ἄλλους ἐρεῖς; TestSol 1:6 D λέγει Νάθαν πρὸς τὸν ἄγγελον; ApcEsdr 6:16; s. also 1aα above) Mk 4:41; 16:3; Lk 4:21; 8:25 (λ. πρὸς ἀλλήλους as Jos., Ant. 2, 108; 9, 239); 9:23; 12:1; 16:1; J 2:3; 3:4; Ac 2:12; 28:4. μετά τινος: ἔλεγον μετʼ ἀλλήλων they said to each other J 11:56.
    δ. in other (s. 1aα, 1bα, 1bγ) prep. uses ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (=ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ v.l.) σὺ τοῦτο λέγεις; do you say this of your own accord? J 18:34 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38] al.). εἴς τινα against someone Lk 22:65. τὶ περί τινος say someth. about or concerning someone J 1:22; Ac 8:34; Tit 2:8. λ. περὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ὅτι say, with reference to the temple, that Lk 21:5. τί σὺ λέγεις περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι; what have you to say about him, since? J 9:17b (λ. τι περί τινος, ὅτι as Jos., Bell. 7, 215). τινὶ περί τινος say to someone about someone w. direct discourse foll. Mt 11:7. Also πρός τινα περί τινος (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 279 πρὸς αὐτὸν περὶ Μωϋσέως) Lk 7:24. πρός τινα ἐπί τινος bring charges against someone before someone Ac 23:30 (λ. ἐπί τινος as Jos., Vi. 258). λ. περί (v.l. ὑπέρ) τινος say (someth.), speak in someone’s defense 26:1.
    ε. in connection w. adverbs and adv. exprs.: Λυκαονιστὶ λ. say in (the) Lycaonian (language) Ac 14:11. καλῶς correctly (X., Mem. 2, 7, 11; 3, 3, 4; TestJob 7:8; EpArist 125; 196) J 8:48; 13:13. ὡσαύτως in the same way Mk 14:31. ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν truly, I tell you Lk 12:44; 21:3. κατὰ ἄνθρωπον (s. ἄνθρωπος 2b) Ro 3:5; Gal 3:15. κατὰ συγγνώμην, οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν (s. ἐπιταγή) 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. καθʼ ὑστέρησιν Phil 4:11.
    ζ. w. emphasis on a certain kind of saying: φωνῇ μεγάλῃ in a loud voice Rv 5:12; 8:13 (cp. TestSol 16:1). Also ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 14:7; 9. ἄγγελος ἐν φωνῇ λέγων GJs 20:4 (pap, s. deStrycker p. 387f). Opp. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ (cp. Ps 13:1) 18:7. Also ἐν ἑαυτῷ (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 11 [Stone p. 62]; TestJob 23:8) Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 3:8; 7:39, 49; GJs 1:1,4; 3:1; 5:1; cp. 1:3 (codd.); 2:1 v.l.; 14:1 v.l.
    η. in quotations fr. scripture (but s. also Epict. 1, 28, 4 ὡς λέγει Πλάτων with a quotation) Ἠσαί̈ας λέγει Isaiah says Ro 10:16, 20; 15:12. Μωϋσῆς λέγει 10:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει 11:9. ἡ γραφὴ λέγει (Just., D. 56, 17; cp. Paus. 2, 16, 4 τὰ ἔπη λέγει=the epic poets say) 4:3; 10:11; Gal 4:30; 1 Ti 5:18; Js 4:5; cp. 2:23; J 19:24; 2 Cl 14:2. In the case of the quot. formula λέγει without the subj. expressed, ἡ γραφή or ὁ θεός is easily understood (B-D-F §130, 3; Rob. 392.—On the omission of the subj. [Just., D. 101, 1 al.] cp. Epict. 1, 24, 12 λέγει σοι ‘θὲς κτλ.’=someone says to you ‘lay aside [this and that sign of prestige]’). It could prob. be translated indefinitely it says: Ro 15:10; 2 Cor 6:2; Gal 3:16; Eph 4:8; 5:14. ὁ θεός is obviously the subj. (Clearch., Fgm. 69c; Epict. 1, 1, 10 λέγει ὁ Ζεύς, followed by a divine revelation to Epictetus) Hb 5:6. λέγει ὁ κύριος 2 Cl 13:2; cp. Hb 8:8–10 (λέγει κύριος Am 5:27; Is 1:18; Jer 9:24; ParJer 6:16 al.). W. the passage more definitely indicated (schol. on Pind., O. 7, 66 ἐν τοῖς Μουσαίου λέγεται; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 3, 1179 Wendel v.l. ἐν τῇ γ´ τῆς Μουσαίου Τιτανογραφίας λέγεται ὡς) ἐν Ἠλίᾳ τί λέγει ἡ γραφή Ro 11:2 (Epict. 2, 17, 34 τί λέγει Χρύσιππος ἐν τοῖς περὶ τοῦ ψευδομένου). Δαυὶδ λέγει ἐν βίβλῳ ψαλμῶν Lk 20:42 (Epict. 2, 19, 14 Ἑλλάνικος λέγει ἐν τοῖς Αἰγυπτιακοῖς with quot.). ἐν τ. Ὡσηὲ λέγει Ro 9:25. λέγει ἐν τῷ Ἠσαί̈ᾳ 2 Cl 3:5 (Just., D. 123, 8); cp. ἐν Δαυίδ Hb 4:7. ὁ νόμος λέγει (cp. Pla., Crito 12, 50c; Epict. 3, 24, 43 τί γὰρ λέγει; [i.e. ὁ νόμος θεῖος]) 1 Cor 14:34. λέγει τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Hb 3:7 (Just., D. 124, 1). Of words of Jesus: λέγει ὁ κύριος ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 2 Cl 8:5. λέγει ὁ κύριος 5:2; 6:1. λέγει αὐτός (i.e. ὁ Χριστός 2:7) 3:2. λέγει 4:2.
    θ. Hebraistic, though by no means limited to the OT (s. EKieckers, IndogF 35, 1915, 34ff; B-D-F §420; Mlt-H. 454), is the freq. use of λ. to introduce
    א. direct discourse (like לֵאמֹר), even though it is preceded by a verb of saying, or one that includes the idea of saying. Esp. λέγων is so used, as in the LXX, e.g. after ἀναβοᾶν, ἀνακράζειν Mk 1:23 (cp. Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 3, 9 Jac. ἀνεκεκράγει λέγων), ἀπαγγέλλειν, ἀποκρίνεσθαι, ἀρνεῖσθαι, βοᾶν, γογγύζειν, διαγογγύζειν, διαλογίζεσθαι, διαμαρτύρεσθαι, διαστέλλεσθαι, διδάσκειν, δοξάζειν, εἰπεῖν Mt 22:1; Lk 12:16; 20:2 (s. B-D-F §101, p. 46; s. Rob. 882f; Kieckers, loc. cit. 36f), ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, ἐντέλλεσθαι, ἐπερωτᾶν, ἐπιτιμᾶν, ἐπιφωνεῖν, ἐρωτᾶν, κατηγορεῖν, κηρύσσειν, κράζειν, κραυγάζειν, λαλεῖν, μαρτυρεῖν, μεριμνᾶν, παραινεῖν, παρακαλεῖν, παρατιθέναι παραβολήν, προσεύχεσθαι, προσφωνεῖν, προφητεύειν, συζητεῖν, συλλαλεῖν, φωνεῖν, ψευδομαρτυρεῖν; s. these entries. Also after such verbs as denote an action accompanied by a statement of some kind: ἄγγελος κυρίου … ἐφάνη αὐτῷ λέγων appeared to him and said Mt 1:20; cp. 2:13; προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λ. fell before him and said 8:2; 9:18; cp. 14:33. ἅπτεσθαι 8:3; 9:29. ἔρχεσθαι Mk 5:35; Lk 18:3; 19:18 al.; cp. Lk 1:66; 5:8; 8:38; 15:9; Ac 8:10, 19; 12:7; 27:23f; 1 Cor 11:25 al.
    ב. the content of a written document (2 Km 11:15; 4 Km 10:6.—1 Macc 8:31; 11:57; Jos., Ant. 11, 26) ἔγραψεν λέγων (=יִכְתֹּב לֵאמֹר) he wrote as follows Lk 1:63.
    ג. orders or instructions to be carried out by other persons: ἔπεμψεν λέγων he sent and had them say Lk 7:19. ἀπέστειλεν λ. (Judg 11:14f; Jdth 3:1; JosAs 3:2; ParJer 3:21 al.) Mt 22:16; 27:19; Lk 7:20; 19:14; J 11:3. If the persons carrying out the orders are named, the ptc. can refer to them Mt 22:16 v.l.
    ד. When it is used w. the ptc. λ. appears in its finite forms ἐμπαίζοντες ἔλεγον they mocked and said Mt 27:41. προσελθὼν αὐτῷ λέγει he approached him and said Mk 14:45. διαρρήξας … λέγει he tore his clothes as he said vs. 63; cp. vs. 67; 15:35; Lk 6:20; J 1:36; Hb 8:8a al.—Also pleonastically (TestSol 2:2; TestJob 23:4; cp. Homeric ἀμειβόμενος προσέειπε Il. 3, 437 al., προσηύδα 14, 270 al.) ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει he answered Mk 8:29b; 9:5, 19; 10:24; 11:22; Lk 3:11; 11:45; 13:8. κράξας λέγει he cried out Mk 5:7; 9:24 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 109, 29 [Stone p. 66] κράζων καὶ λέγων; ApcEsdr 1:2 κράξας λέγων).
    ι. Now and then short exprs. with λ. are inserted as parentheses (B-D-F §465, 2; Rob. 434): πολλοί, λέγω ὑμῖν, ζητήσουσιν many, I tell you, will seek Lk 13:24. ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ λέγω 2 Cor 11:21b. ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 6:13.
    κ. ptc. w. the article τὰ λεγόμενα what was said (EpArist 215, 298; TestSol 15:13; ApcEsdr 2:15; Jos., Ant. 3, 85; 207; Just., D. 46, 4; 115, 1) Lk 18:34. προσεῖχον τ. λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τ. Φιλίππου (προσέχω 2b) Ac 8:6 (προσέχ. τοῖς λεγ. as Jos., Ant. 13, 303; τὰ λ. ὑπό τινος as Bell. 7, 56; 423; Esth 3:3, also Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 24, p. 408, 19 ὑπὸ τῶν μάντεων; Fgm. 30 p. 417, 23 Jac.; Epict. 1, 18, 1; SIG 679, 87). τὰ ἢ λεχθέντα ἢ πραχθέντα (Ps.-Libanius, Charact. Ep. p. 48, 18; 64, 18; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 55) Papias (2:15) in Eus., HE 3, 39, 15 (=Geb., Harn., Zahn 15, p. 72, 17).
    ② to express oneself in a specific way, say
    ⓐ ask w. direct question foll: Mt 9:14; 15:1; 18:1; Mk 5:30f. ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει the Master asks 14:14. W. dat. of pers. and a direct question foll.: Mt 9:28a; 15:34; 16:15; 20:6.
    ⓑ answer (Lucian, Syr. Dea 18; TestSol 5:8 al.; ApcMos 5) Mt 17:25; Mk 8:24; J 1:21; 18:17b. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse: Mt 4:10; 8:26; 9:28b; 14:17; 15:33; 18:22; 19:7, 20 al. W. dat of pers. and direct discourse introduced by ὅτι Mt 19:8.
    ⓒ order, command, direct, enjoin, recommend more or less emphatically (Syntipas p. 9, 4; Num 32:27; TestSol 4:7 D; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 21 [Stone p. 44]) τὶ someth. 2 Cl 6:4. ἃ λέγω Lk 6:46. τί τινι command someone (to do) someth. ὅ τι ἂν λέγῃ ὑμῖν J 2:5b (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 8 [Stone p. 10]); cp. Ac 21:23 (s. Num 32:31). ὅ ὑμῖν λέγω, πᾶσιν λέγω, γρηγορεῖτε the order I give to you I give to everyone: be on your guard! Mk 13:37 (for the formal nuance cp. reff. at end of this parag.). Gener. w. dat. of pers. and direct discourse foll.: Mt 5:44; 6:25; 8:4, 9; 26:52; Mk 3:3, 5; 5:8; 6:10; Lk 6:27; 7:8; J 2:7f. W. dat. of pers. and inf. foll.: Rv 10:9; 13:14; w. an inf. and a negative forbid (X., An. 7, 1, 40) Mt 5:34, 39.—Here belongs χαίρειν τινὶ λέγειν (Epict. 3, 22, 64) extend a greeting to someone, since the greeting consists in saying χαῖρε=‘may you prosper’ 2J 10f. W. ἵνα foll. recommend that, tell to τῷ λαῷ λέγων … ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν Ac 19:4. οὐ περὶ ἐκείνης λέγω ἵνα ἐρωτήσῃ I do not recommend that anyone should pray about that (sin) 1J 5:16. W. inf. foll.: Ro 2:22.—τάδε λέγει is the formal style of one who is giving an order (introductory formula for the edicts of the Persian kings [IMagnMai 115, 4]; in the OT a favorite method of introducing a prophetic statement [Thackeray p. 11]) Ac 21:11, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (s. Gerhard, Philol. 64, 1905, 27ff; Thieme 23; GRudberg, Eranos 11, 1911, 177f; LLafoscade, De epistulis imperatorum 1902, 63 and 77. Roman edicts gener. use the simple λέγει as in the praescriptio of SEG IX, 8 I, 1–3 αὐτοκράτωρ Καίσαρ Σεβαστὸς … λέγει; also by Augustus: Jos., Ant., 16, 162; s. MBenner, The Emperor Says ’75).
    ⓓ assure, assert; w. direct discourse foll. Esp. in the formulas λέγω σοι, λ. ὑμῖν, ἀμὴν (ἀμὴν) λ. ὑμῖν (TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 19f [Stone p. 18]) Mt 11:22; 12:31; 19:24; 23:39; Mk 11:24; Lk 4:25; 7:9, 28; 9:27.—Mt 5:26; 6:2, 5; 8:10; Mk 3:28; 9:41; 10:15; Lk 4:24; 18:17, 29; 23:43; J 1:51; 3:3, 5, 11; 5:19, 24f; 6:26, 32 al.
    ⓔ maintain, declare, proclaim as teaching, w. direct discourse foll.: Gal 4:1; 1J 2:4. Foll. by acc. and inf. (X., Symp. 5, 5) Mt 22:23; Mk 12:18; Lk 20:41; 23:2b; Ro 15:8; 2 Ti 2:18. Foll. by ὅτι and direct discourse Mk 12:35b; 1 Cor 15:12. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse after ὅτι Mt 5:20, 22, 28, 32; 8:11 al. Someth. like interpret εἰς w. ref. to Eph 5:32.—σὺ λέγεις (that is what) you maintain Mt 27:11; Mk 15:2; Lk 23:3 (cp. σὺ εἶπας Mt 26:25 and s. εἶπον 1a). Cp. also Lk 22:70; J 18:37 (s. OMerlier, RevÉtGr 46, ’33, 204–19; Goodsp., Probs. 64–68 [strong affirmative, yes]; MSmith, JBL 64, ’45, 506–10 [intentionally ambiguous, so you say, Tannaitic Parallels to the Gospels, ’51, 27–30]; DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’70/71, 213–26). τί λέγει ἡ γνῶσις; what does Gnosis teach about this? With the answer in direct discourse B 6:9 (cp. Epict. 3, 13, 11 καὶ τί λέγει [i.e., ὁ λόγος ὁ τῶν φιλοσόφων=philosophy]; direct discourse follows).
    ⓕ of written communications (Hdt. 3, 40; 122; 8, 140; UPZ 68, 5 [152 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 13, 80) 1 Cor 6:5; 7:6; 15:51; 2 Cor 6:13; 8:8; Gal 5:2; Phil 4:11; Col 2:4; Phlm 21, al. in Paul.
    ③ to inform about / tell of someth., speak, report (Diog. L. 1, 31) τινί to someone Mk 7:36. τὶ about someth. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 16 νῦν λέξομεν τὰς Κύρου πράξεις) τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ of his death (lit., departure) Lk 9:31. τὰ περὶ τ. βασιλείας Ac 1:3. τὰ γινόμενα ὑπʼ αὐτῶν αἰσχρόν ἐστιν καὶ λέγειν it is a disgrace even to speak of the things they do Eph 5:12 (Demosth. 10, 27 ὸ̔ … οὔτε λέγειν ἄξιον). τινὶ περί τινος bring a report about someone to someone Mk 1:30; 8:30. Likew. τινί τινα Phil 3:18.
    ④ to identify in a specific manner, call, name (Aeschyl. et al.) w. double acc. (Epict. 2, 19, 19 τί Στωικὸν ἔλεγες σεαυτόν; Diog. L. 8, 88 τὴν ἡδονὴν λέγειν τὸ ἀγαθόν=call pleasure the [real] good; 2 Macc 4:2; Just., D. 61, 1 ἀρχηστρατηγὸν ἑαυτὸν λέγει) τινά τι describe someone as someth. τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν; why do you call me good? Mk 10:18; Lk 18:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν κύριον David calls him Lord Mk 12:37. πατέρα ἴδιον ἔλεγεν τὸν θεόν he called God his Father J 5:18. οὐκέτι λέγω ὑμᾶς δούλους I no longer call you slaves 15:15; cp. Ac 10:28; Rv 2:20. Pass. be called, named Mt 13:55; Hb 11:24. ὁ λεγόμενος the so-called (Epict. 4, 1, 51 οἱ βασιλεῖς λεγόμενοι; Socrat., Ep. 14, 7 ὁ λ. θάνατος) λεγόμενοι θεοί so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5 (Herm. Wr. 2, 14 the λεγόμενοι θεοί in contrast to μόνος ὁ θεός. Somewhat differently Jos., Ant. 12, 125 Ἀντίοχος ὁ παρὰ τοῖς Ἕλλησιν θεὸς λεγόμενος). οἱ λεγόμενοι ἀκροβυστία ὑπὸ τῆς λ. περιτομῆς those who are called ‘the uncircumcised’ (i.e. gentiles) by the so-called circumcision (i.e. Jews) Eph 2:11. ὁ λεγόμενος (B-D-F §412, 2; Rob. 1107; cp. BGU 1117, 9 [13 B.C.]; PRyl 133, 11; 137, 19; 2 Macc 12:17; 14:6; 3 Macc 1:3; TestAbr B 13 p. 118, 14 [Stone p. 84]; TestJob 46:5; 47:1; Just., A I, 22, 1, D. 32, 1) who is called … Mt 1:16; 27:17; whose surname is (Appian, Liby. 49 §213 Ἄννων ὁ μέγας λεγόμενος; Jos., Ant. 13, 370, Vi. 4) 10:2; Col 4:11; by name Mt 9:9; 26:3, 14; 27:16; Mk 15:7; Lk 22:47; J 9:11.—Of things: of the name of a star Rv 8:11. Of place-names (BGU 326, 19 [II A.D.]; 2 Macc 9:2; 12:21) Mt 2:23; 26:36; J 4:5; 11:54; 19:13; Ac 3:2; 6:9; Hb 9:3. Of the local, vernacular name λ. Ἑβραϊστί J 5:2 v.l.; 19:17b.—In the transl. of foreign words (which) means: ὅ ἐστιν κρανίου τόπος λεγόμενος which means ‘Place of a Skull’ Mt 27:33b. Cp. also J 4:25; 11:16; 20:24; 21:2. Also ὸ̔ λέγεται 20:16. ὸ̔ λ. μεθερμηνευόμενον which, when translated, means 1:38. ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται Ac 9:36.—Other exx. of the significance mean (Aeschyl. et al.) are Gal 4:1; 2 Cl 6:4; 8:6 Cp. 1bβ.—B. 1253f; 1257; 1277. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. S. λόγος, ῥῆμα, λαλέω.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λέγω

  • 6 δικαιόω

    δικαιόω fut. δικαιώσω; 1 aor. ἐδικαίωσα. Pass.: 1 fut. δικαιωθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐδικαιώθην, subj. δικαιωθῶ, ptc. δικαιωθείς; pf. δεδικαίωμαι Ro 6:7; 1 Cor 4:4; ptc. δεδικαιωμένος Lk 18:14 (Soph., Hdt.; Aristot., EN 1136a; et al.; pap, LXX; En 102:10; TestAbr A 13 p. 93, 14 [Stone p. 34]; Test12Patr; ApcSed, 14:8 p. 136, 15 Ja.; Jos., Ant. 17, 206; Just.; Ath., R. 53, 1; 65, 14) to practice δικαιοσύνη.
    ① to take up a legal cause, show justice, do justice, take up a cause τινά (Polyb. 3, 31, 9 ὑμᾶς δὲ αὐτοὺς … δικαιώσεσθε ‘you will (find it necessary to) take up your own cause’ = you will sit in judgment on yourselves; Cass. Dio 48, 46 ‘Antony was not taking Caesar’s side’ in the matter; 2 Km 15:4; Ps 81:3) δικαιῶσαι δίκαιον take up the cause of an upright pers. 1 Cl 16:12 (Is 53:11); τινί χήρᾳ (χήραν v.l.) 8:4 (Is 1:17 ‘take up the cause of the widow’).
    ② to render a favorable verdict, vindicate.
    ⓐ as activity of humans justify, vindicate, treat as just (Appian, Liby. 17 §70; Gen 44:16; Sir 10:29; 13:22; 23:11 al.) θέλων δ. ἑαυτόν wishing to justify himself Lk 10:29; δ. ἑαυτὸν ἐνώπιόν τινος j. oneself before someone=‘you try to make out a good case for yourselves before the public’ 16:15 (δ. ἐαυτόν as En 102:10; but s. JJeremias, ZNW 38, ’39, 117f [against him SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 1ff]). ὁ δικαιούμενός μοι the one who vindicates himself before (or against) me B 6:1 (cp. Is 50:8). τελῶναι ἐδικαίωσαν τὸν θεόν βαπτισθέντες tax-collectors affirmed God’s uprightness and got baptized i.e. by ruling in God’s favor they admitted that they were in the wrong and took a new direction (opp. τὴν βουλὴν τ. θεοῦ ἀθετεῖν) Lk 7:29 (cp. PsSol 2:15; 3:5; 8:7, 23; 9:2).
    ⓑ of experience or activity of transcendent figures, esp. in relation to humans
    α. of wisdom ἐδικαιώθη ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς is vindicated by her children (on δικ. ἀπό cp. Is 45:25. S. also Appian, Basil. 8: δικαιόω=consider someth. just or correct) Lk 7:35; also ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων αὐτῆς Mt 11:19 (v.l. τέκνων). On this saying s. DVölter, NThT 8, 1919, 22–42; JBover, Biblica 6, 1925, 323–25; 463–65; M-JLagrange, ibid. 461–63. Of an angel Hm 5, 1, 7.
    β. of God be found in the right, be free of charges (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 93, 14 [Stone p. 34] ‘be vindicated’ in a trial by fire) Mt 12:37 (opp. καταδικάζειν). δεδικαιωμένος Lk 18:14; GJs 5:1; δεδικαιωμένη (Salome) 20:4 (not pap). Ac 13:39 (but s. 3 below); Rv 22:11 v.l; Dg 5:14.—Paul, who has influenced later wr. (cp. Iren. 3, 18, 7 [Harv. II 102, 2f]), uses the word almost exclusively of God’s judgment. As affirmative verdict Ro 2:13. Esp. of pers. δικαιοῦσθαι be acquitted, be pronounced and treated as righteous and thereby become δίκαιος, receive the divine gift of δικαιοσύνη through faith in Christ Jesus and apart from νόμος as a basis for evaluation (MSeifrid, Justification by Faith—The Origin and Development of a Central Pauline Theme ’92) 3:20 (Ps 142:2), 24, 28; 4:2; 5:1, 9; 1 Cor 4:4; Gal 2:16f (Ps 142:2); 3:11, 24; 5:4; Tit 3:7; Phil 3:12 v.l.; B 4:10; 15:7; IPhld 8:2; Dg 9:4; (w. ἁγιάζεσθαι) Hv 3, 9, 1. οὐ παρὰ τοῦτο δεδικαίωμαι I am not justified by this (after 1 Cor 4:4) IRo 5:1. ἵνα δικαιωθῇ σου ἡ σάρξ that your flesh (as the sinful part) may be acquitted Hs 5, 7, 1; δ. ἔργοις by (on the basis of) works, by what one does 1 Cl 30:3; cp. Js 2:21, 24f (ἔργον 1a and πίστις 2dδ); διʼ ἐαυτῶν δ. by oneself=as a result of one’s own accomplishments 1 Cl 32:4. (cp. κατὰ νόμον Hippol., Ref. 7, 34, 1).—Since Paul views God’s justifying action in close connection with the power of Christ’s resurrection, there is sometimes no clear distinction between the justifying action of acquittal and the gift of new life through the Holy Spirit as God’s activity in promoting uprightness in believers. Passages of this nature include Ro 3:26, 30; 4:5 (on δικαιοῦν τὸν ἀσεβῆ cp. the warning against accepting δῶρα to arrange acquittal Ex 23:7 and Is 5:23; δικαιούμενοι δωρεάν Ro 3:24 is therefore all the more pointed); 8:30, 33 (Is 50:8); Gal 3:8; Dg 9:5. For the view (held since Chrysostom) that δ. in these and other pass. means ‘make upright’ s. Goodsp., Probs. 143–46, JBL 73, ’54, 86–91.
    ③ to cause someone to be released from personal or institutional claims that are no longer to be considered pertinent or valid, make free/pure (the act. Ps 72:13) in our lit. pass. δικαιοῦμαι be set free, made pure ἀπό from (Sir 26:29; TestSim 6:1, both δικ. ἀπὸ [τῆς] ἁμαρτίας) ἀπὸ πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμω Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι from everything fr. which you could not be freed by the law of Moses Ac 13:38; cp. vs. 39. ὁ ἀποθανὼν δεδικαίωται ἀπὸ τ. ἁμαρτίας the one who died is freed fr. sin Ro 6:7 (s. KKuhn, ZNW 30, ’31, 305–10; EKlaar, ibid. 59, ’68, 131–34). In the context of 1 Cor 6:11 ἐδικαιώθητε means you have become pure.—In the language of the mystery religions (Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 258ff) δικαιοῦσθαι refers to a radical inner change which the initiate experiences (Herm. Wr. 13, 9 χωρὶς γὰρ κρίσεως ἰδὲ πῶς τὴν ἀδικίαν ἐξήλασεν. ἐδικαιώθημεν, ὦ τέκνον, ἀδικίας ἀπούσης) and approaches the sense ‘become deified’. Some are inclined to find in 1 Ti 3:16 a similar use; but see under 4.
    ④ to demonstrate to be morally right, prove to be right, pass. of God is proved to be right Ro 3:4; 1 Cl 18:4 (both Ps 50:6). Of Christ 1 Ti 3:16.—Lit. s. on δικαιοσύνη 3c.—HRosman, Iustificare (δικαιοῦν) est verbum causativum: Verbum Domini 21, ’41, 144–47; NWatson, Δικ. in the LXX, JBL 79, ’60, 255–66; CCosgrove, JBL 106, ’87, 653–70.—DELG s.v. δίκη. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δικαιόω

  • 7 κρίνω

    κρίνω (s. κρίμα; Hom.+) fut. κρινῶ; 1 aor. ἔκρινα; pf. κέκρικα; plpf. 3 sg. κεκρίκει (on the lack of augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; W-S. §12, 4; Mlt-H. 190; ἐκεκρίκει Just., D. 102, 2). Pass.: impf. ἐκρινόμην; 1 fut. κριθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐκρίθην; pf. κέκριμαι. Primary mng.: ‘to set apart so as to distinguish, separate’, then by transference
    ① to make a selection, select, prefer (Aeschyl., Suppl. 39 τὶ; Pla., Rep. 3, 399e κρίνειν τινὰ πρό τινος ‘prefer someone to someone’, cp. Phlb. 57e; Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 3 κ. τί τινι=select someth. because of someth. [a place because of its size]; κ. τὸ πρακτέον καὶ μὴ πρακτέον Did., Gen. 27, 3) ὸ̔ς μὲν γὰρ κρίνει ἡμέραν παρʼ ἡμέραν the one prefers one day to another Ro 14:5a. In the other half of the sentence ὸ̔ς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, κ. prob. has the sense recognize, approve (X., Hell. 1, 7, 34 ἔκριναν τὴν τῆς βουλῆς γνώμην) the other holds every day in esteem vs. 5b. Closely associated is mng.
    ② to pass judgment upon (and thereby seek to influence) the lives and actions of other people
    ⓐ judge, pass judgment upon, express an opinion about Mt 7:1a, 2a; Lk 6:37a; 1 Cl 13:2; Pol 2:3 (Sextus 183 ὁ κρίνων ἄνθρωπον κρίνεται ὑπὸ τ. θεοῦ). κ. δικαίως D 4:3; B 19:11. κ. κατʼ ὄψιν by the outward appearance J 7:24a. κατὰ τὴν σάρκα 8:15. τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κ. pass a right judgment 7:24b (on the expr. cp. Dt 16:18). This is perh. the place for 1 Pt 4:6 ἵνα κριθῶσιν κατὰ ἀνθρ. (s. ESelwyn, comm. ad loc. ref. to Lghtf.; cp. Wsd 3:4).
    ⓑ esp. pass an unfavorable judgment upon, criticize, find fault with, condemn (Epict. 2, 21, 11) Ro 2:1abc, 3; 14:3f, 10, 13a (a play on words, w. κρίνειν used in two different mngs. in the same vs.; s. 4 below on vs. 13b); Col 2:16; Js 4:11, 12; D 11:12. μή τι κρίνετε do not pronounce judgment on anything 1 Cor 4:5. ἱνατί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως; why is my freedom (of action) to be unfavorably judged by another person’s scruples? 1 Cor 10:29. μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτόν happy is the one who finds no fault w. himself Ro 14:22.—Also of a human judgment directed against God ὅπως ἂν νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε that you may win when you are judged Ro 3:4 (OMichel in KEK prefers active sense); 1 Cl 18:4 (both Ps 50:6).
    ③ to make a judgment based on taking various factors into account, judge, think, consider, look upon w. double acc. of the obj. and the predicate (Soph., Oed. R. 34; Pla., Rep. 9, 578b and s. Cebes 39, 4; 3 Macc 2:33; Just., D. 112, 1) οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτούς you do not consider yourselves worthy Ac 13:46 (Jos., Ant. 6, 159 ὸ̔ν αὐτὸς τ. βασιλείας ἄξιον ἔκρινεν; EpArist 98); cp. PtK 3 p. 15, 17. τὰ ὑστερήματα αὐτῶν ἴδια ἐκρίνετε you considered their shortcomings as your own 1 Cl 2:6. Pass. (Thu. 2, 40, 3; Jos., Ant. 4, 193) τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρʼ ὑμῖν; why do you think it is incredible? Ac 26:8 (Jos., Ant. 18, 76 ἄπιστα αὐτὰ κρίνειν).—Foll. by acc. w. inf. (Pla., Gorg., 452c, Rep. 9, 578b; X., An. 1, 9, 5; 28) κεκρίκατέ με πιστὴν … εἶναι Ac 16:15.—W. inf. foll. κρίνω μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς κτλ. 15:19.—Foll. by τοῦτο ὅτι 2 Cor 5:14.—W. direct quest. foll. ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε judge, decide for yourselves 1 Cor 11:13.—W. indirect quest. foll. (Thu. 4, 130, 7 κρίναντες ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, εἰ … ; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 5) εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν, ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ, κρίνατε decide whether it is right to obey you rather than God Ac 4:19.—κρίνατε ὑμεῖς ὅ φημι pass your own judgment on what I say 1 Cor 10:15.—ὀρθῶς ἔκρινας you have judged rightly Lk 7:43.
    ④ to come to a conclusion after a cognitive process, reach a decision, decide, propose, intend (Isocr. 4, 46; Polyb. 3, 6, 7; 5, 52, 6; 9, 13, 7; Epict. 2, 15, 7; Appian, Bell. Civ. 14, 118 §497 ὅταν οἱ θεοὶ κρίνωσιν; LXX) τί οὖν θέλετε, κρίνατε (restored) so decide now what you wish (to be done); w. inf. (Diod S 4, 33, 10; 17, 95, 1; UPZ 42, 37 [162 B.C.]; PTebt 55, 4 [II B.C.] ἔκρινα γράψαι; PLond III, 897, 11 p. 207 [84 A.D.]; 1 Macc 11:33; 3 Macc 1:6; Jdth 11:13; Wsd 8:9; Jos., Ant.7, 33; 12, 403; 13, 188; Did., Gen. 179, 7) Ac 3:13; 20:16; 25:25; 1 Cor 2:2; 5:3; Tit 3:12. W. τοῦ and inf. (B-D-F §397, 2) ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς Ac 27:1. ἐπεὶ ἤδη σεαυτῷ κέκρικας τοῦ μὴ δύνασθαι τὰς ἐντολὰς ταύτας ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπου φυλαχθῆναι since you have already decided in your own mind that these commandments cannot be kept by anyone Hm 12, 3, 6.—W. acc. and inf. (2 Macc 11:25, 36; 3 Macc 6:30; TestSol 10:8; SibOr 3, 127; Just., D. 102, 2) Ac 21:25 (even in the substantially different rdgs.). τοῦτο κέκρικεν …, τηρεῖν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον he has determined this, namely to keep his fiancée (pure and undefiled) 1 Cor 7:37 (s. s.v. γαμίζω 2; Diod S 4, 73, 2 of a father: κρίναι ταύτην [i.e. his daughter] παρθένον διαφυλάττειν). τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα but rather decide this, (namely) to give no offense Ro 14:13b. ἔκρινα ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο, τὸ … ἐλθεῖν 2 Cor 2:1. τὰ δόγματα τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τ. ἀποστόλων Ac 16:4 (cp. Polyb. 5, 52, 6 πράξας τὸ κριθέν; Epict. 2, 15, 7 τοῖς κριθεῖσιν ἐμμένειν δεῖ).
    ⑤ to engage in a judicial process, judge, decide, hale before a court, condemn, also hand over for judicial punishment, freq. as a legal t.t. (in a forensic sense Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    ⓐ of a human court
    α. act. and pass. abs. Ac 13:27. W. adv. GPt 3:7. κ. τινά: κατὰ τὸν νόμον J 18:31; Ac 23:3; 24:6 v.l. οὐδὲ ἐγὼ κρίνω ὑμᾶς GJs 16:3. Of the right of the apostle and the church to judge believers 1 Cor 5:12ab. μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον; does our law (personified) judge a person? J 7:51 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 50 §205 certain senators desire that before Mark Antony is declared a public enemy he should be brought to trial, ὡς οὐ πάτριον σφίσιν ἀκρίτου καταδικάζειν ‘on the ground that it was not their ancestral custom to condemn someone without a hearing’). ἐκ τ. στόματός σου κρινῶ σε I will punish you on the basis of your own statement Lk 19:22. Pass. Ac 25:10. κρίνεσθαι ἐπί τινι be on trial because of a thing 26:6 (Appian, Basil. 12 κρινόμενος ἐπὶ τῷδε=be brought to trial because of this thing; likew. Iber. 55 §233; Ath. 2, 3; of God ApcrEzk Fgm. d). Also περί τινος (Diod S 12, 30, 5) 23:6; 25:20; w. addition of ἐπί w. gen. of the court of judicature before someone (schol. on Hes., Op. 9) 24:21; 25:9; D 11:11.—τί δὲ καὶ ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον; Lk 12:57, which leads over into the sphere of jurisprudence (vs. 58), means: why cannot you yourselves decide what is right? (cp. the prayer for vengeance fr. Amorgos [BCH 25, 1901 p. 416; Dssm., LO 94=LAE 118] ἐπάκουσον, θεά, καὶ κρῖναι τὸ δίκαιον; cp. Appian, Mithrid. 89 §403 κρίνειν τὴν μάχην=decide the battle; Just., A II, 15, 5).
    β. mid. and pass.: ‘dispute, quarrel, debate’, also go to law (so Thu. 4, 122, 4 δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι; Hos 2:4 al. in LXX; TestSol 4:4ff D; Mel., P. 101, 773) τινί with someone (Job 9:3; 13:19) Mt 5:40; B 6:1 (Is 50:8); μετά τινος (Vi. Aesopi W 76 κριθῆναί με μετὰ τῆς κυρίας μου ἐπὶ σοί=I am pleading my case with my mistress before you; Eccl 6:10) 1 Cor 6:6. ἐπί τινος before someone (as judge) vs. 1 (on the beginning of 1 Cor 6 cp. the decree of Alexander to the Greeks in Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21: βούλομαι δὲ μὴ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς κρίνειν ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον, οὐδὲ ἐφʼ οὗ βούλεσθε=it is my wish [will] that you are not to go to law among yourselves, no matter what any of you may have against another, nor before anyone you wish).
    ⓑ of the divine tribunal
    α. occupied by God or Christ: abs. administer justice, judge J 5:30; 8:16, 50; cp. vs. 26; Rv 6:10; B 5:7. Pass. be judged Mt 7:1b, 2b; Lk 6:37b; Rv 11:18.—W. acc. foll. (PGM 4, 1013 of Horus ὁ κρίνων τὰ πάντα) J 5:22; 8:15b. τοὺς ἔξω 1 Cor 5:13. ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς judge the living and the dead 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; B 7:2. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων Ro 2:16. τὸν κόσμον B 4:12 (TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 10 [Stone p. 32]; ApcEsdr 3:3 p. 27, 8 Tdf.). τὴν οἰκουμένην Ac 17:31; AcPl Ha 9, 29. κ. κατὰ τὸ ἑκάστου ἔργον judge each one by what that person does 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Rv 20:13. ἐκρίθησαν οἱ νεκροὶ ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν the dead were judged by what was written in the books (of life and of death), in accordance w. their deeds vs. 12; δικαίως κ. judge uprightly (Sotades [280 B.C.] Fgm. 11, 2 Diehl2 II 6 p. 191 [in Stob. 4, 34, 8 vol. V p. 826, 5=Coll. Alex. p. 243] ὁ παντογενὴς … οὐ κρίνει δικαίως) 1 Pt 2:23; B 19:11. Also ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ Rv 19:11. διὰ νόμου κρίνεσθαι be judged on the basis of the law Js 2:12.—Oft. the emphasis is unmistakably laid upon that which follows the Divine Judge’s verdict, upon the condemnation or punishment: condemn, punish (opp. σῴζειν as TestJud 24:6; Mel., P. 104, 810; cp. ApcEsdr 1, 11 p. 25, 3 Tdf. ἐμὲ κρῖνον ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) J 3:17; cp. 18ab; 12:47ab, 48a; cp. 48b; Ac 7:7 (Gen 15:14); Dg 7:5f (opp. ἀγαπᾶν). διὰ νόμου κ. punish on the basis of the law Ro 2:12.—3:6f; 1 Cor 11:31f (here of the temporal punishment which God brings upon sinners); 2 Th 2:12; Hb 10:30 (κρινεῖ κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ the Lord will judge = punish his people is derived fr. Dt 32:36=Ps 134:14, where the judgment of God is spoken of, resulting in the vindication of the innocent [the thought prominent in the two OT pass.] and the punishment of the guilty [the thought prominent in the Hb pass.]); 13:4; Js 5:9; for 1 Pt 4:6 s. 2a above; Rv 18:8; 19:2; B 15:5.—W. the punishment given κ. διὰ πυρός 1 Cl 11:1; διὰ τῶν μαστίγων 17:5. κεκριμένοι ἤδη τῷ θανάτῳ already condemned to death B 10:5. Also εἰς θάνατον condemned to death Hs 9, 18, 2. οἱ κρινόμενοι ἀσεβεῖς the godless, who are condemned 2 Cl 18:1. Of the devil ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται J 16:11.—ταῦτα ἔκρινας you have imposed these punishments Rv 16:5.—On κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα 18:20 s. κρίμα 4.
    β. occupied by those who have been divinely commissioned to judge: the 12 apostles judge the 12 tribes Mt 19:28; Lk 22:30 (PBatiffol, RB n.s. 9, 1912, 541–43. But here κ. could have the broader sense rule; cp. 4 Km 15:5; Ps 2:10; 1 Macc 9:73; PsSol 17:29). κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία … σέ the one who is physically uncircumcised will sit in judgment upon you Ro 2:27. οἱ ἅγιοι as judges of the cosmos 1 Cor 6:2ab (κρίνεσθαι ἐν: Diod S 19, 51, 4.—On the saints as co-rulers with God cp. Epict., Ench. 15; Sallust. 21 p. 36, 14) as well as of the angels vs. 3 (cp. Da 7:22).
    ⑥ to ensure justice for someone, see to it that justice is done (LXX) τινί to someone 1 Cl 8:4 (Is 1:17).—B. 1428. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κρίνω

  • 8 ψυχή

    ψῡχ-ή, ἡ,
    A life,

    λύθη ψ. τε μένος τε Il.5.296

    , etc.;

    ψ. τεκαὶ αἰών 16.453

    , cf. Od.9.523;

    θυμοῦ καὶ ψ. Il.11.334

    , Od.21.154;

    λαυκανίην, ἵνα τε ψυχῆς ὤκιστος ὄλεθρος Il.22.325

    ; ψυχὰς παρθέμενοι at hazard of their lives, Od.3.74,9.255;

    αἰεὶ ἐμὴν ψ. παραβαλλόμενος Il.9.322

    ; λίσσου' ὑπὲρ ψ. καὶ γούνων by your life, 22.338; so

    ἀντὶ ψ. S.OC 1326

    : but περὶ ψ. to save their life, Od.9.423;

    περί τε ψυχέων ἐμάχοντο 22.245

    ;

    περὶ ψ. θέον Ἕκτορος Il.22.161

    ;

    τρέχων περὶ τῆς ψ. Hdt.9.37

    ;

    τῆς ἐμῆς περὶ ψ. A.Eu. 115

    , cf. E.Hel. 946, Heracl. 984;

    περὶ ψ. κινδυνεύων Antipho 2.1.4

    , cf. Th. 8.50;

    ἁγὼν.. σῆς ψ. πέρι S.El. 1492

    , cf. E.Ph. 1330, Or. 847, X.Cyr.3.3.44;

    τὸν περὶ ψ. δρόμον δραμεῖν Ar.V. 375

     (lyr.);

    ἀγωνίζεσθαι περὶ τῆς ψ. X.Eq.Mag.1.19

    ; ὃ ἂν θέλῃ, ψυχῆς ὠνεῖται [θυμός] in exchange for life, Heraclit.85;

    τῆς ψ. πρίασθαί τι X.Cyr.3.1.36

    ;

    τί γὰρ δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψ. αὐτοῦ; Ev.Marc.8.37

    . In early poets:

    ψυχὰν ἀποπνεῖν Simon.52

    ;

    ψυχὰς ἔχοντες κυμάτων ἐν ἀγκάλαις Archil.23

    ;

    ψυχέων φειδόμενοι Tyrt.10.14

    ;

    θειδωλὴν ψ. θέμενος Sol.13.46

    ;

    ψυχῆς εἵνεκα καὶ βιότου Thgn.730

    ;

    ψυχὰν Ἀΐδᾳ τελέων Pi.I.1.68

    ;

    ψυχὰς βαλον Id.O.8.39

    ;

    χαλκῷ ἀπὸ ψυχὴν ἀρύσας Emp.138

    ;

    τοὐμὸν ἐκπίνουσ' ἀεὶ ψυχῆς ἄκρατον αἷμα S.El. 786

    ; τῆς ἐμῆς ψ. γεγώς ib. 775;

    τὴν ψ. ἐκπίνουσιν Ar.Nu. 712

     (anap.);

    ψ. ἀφήσω E.Or. 1171

    ;

    ψ. σέθεν ἔκτεινε Id.Tr. 1214

    ;

    ψ. παραιτέεσθαι Hdt.1.24

    ; ποινὴν τῆς Αἰσώπου ψ. satisfaction for the life of A., Id.2.134;

    ψυχῆς ἀποστερῆσαί τινα Antipho 4.1.6

    , cf. Th.1.136, etc.;

    τὴν ψ. ἢ τὴν οὐσίαν ἢ τὴν ἐπιτιμίαν τινὸς ἀφελόμενος Aeschin.2.88

    ;

    τὸ τῆς ψ. ἀπαιτηθεὶς χρέος LXX Wi.15

    . 8, cf. Ev.Luc.12.20;

    ζητοῦσι τὴν ψ. μου LXX 3 Ki.19.10

    , cf. Ev.Matt. 2.20;

    τὴν ψ. αὐτοῦ τίθησιν ὑπὲρ τῶν προβάτων Ev.Jo.10.11

    , etc.; δεῖρον ἄχρις ἡ ψ... ἐπὶ χειλέων λειφθῇ within an inch of his life, Herod.3.3:—the phrase ἐν τῇ χειρὶ τὴν ψ. ἔχοντα taking his life in his hands, is prob. f.l. in Xenarch.4.20;

    ἡ ψ. μου ἐν ταῖς χερσί [σου] διὰ πάντος LXX Ps.118(119).109

    , cf. 1 Ki.19.5, 28.21, al.; of life in animals, Od.14.426, Hes.Sc. 173, Pi.N.1.47, etc.;

    τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα, ὅσα ψ. ἔχει Anaxag.4

    , cf. 12;

    πάντων τῶν ζῴων ἡ ψ. τὸ αὐτό, ἀήρ Diog.

     Apoll.5 (cf. infr. IV. 1); ἡ φύσις τοιαύτη πάντων ὅσσα ψ. ἔχει Democrit.278; ἐπῴζει καὶ ποιεῖ ψ. ἔχειν (of incubation) Epich.172; [

    ἑρπετὸν] ὃ ἔχει ἐν ἑαυτῷ ψ. ζωῆς LXX Ge.1.30

    ; ἡ ψ. πάσης σαρκὸς αἷμα αὐτοῦ ἐστιν ib.Le.17.11, cf. De.12.23.
    2 metaph. of things dear as life,

    χρήματα γὰρ ψ... βροτοῖσι Hes.Op. 686

    ;

    πᾶσι δ' ἀνθρώποις ἄρ' ἦν ψ. τέκν' E.Andr. 419

    ;

    τἀργύριόν ἐστιν αἷμα καὶ ψ. βροτοῖς Timocl.35

    ; so as an endearing name, Hld.1.8, al.;

    ζωὴ καὶ ψ. Juv.6.195

    ;

    ψ. μου Mart.10.68

    .
    II in Hom., departed spirit, ghost (

    ὑποτίθεται [Ὅμηρος] τὰς ψ. τοῖς εἰδώλοις τοῖς ἐν τοῖς κατόπτροις φαινομένοις ὁμοίας.. ἃ καθάπαξ ἡμῖν ἐξείκασται καὶ τὰς κινήσεις μιμεῖται, στερεμνιώδη δὲ ὑπόστασιν οὐδεμίαν ἔχει εἰς ἀντίληψιν καὶ ἁφήν Apollod.

     Hist.Fr. 102(a)J.);

    ψ. Πατροκλῆος.. πάντ' αὐτῷ.. ἐϊκυῖα Il.23.65

    : freq. in Od.11, ψ. Ἀγαμέμνονος, Ἀχιλῆος, etc., 387, 467, al.;

    ψ. καὶ εἴδωλον Il.23.104

    , cf. 72, Od.24.14;

    ψ. κατὰ χθονὸς ᾤχετο τετριγυῖα Il.23.100

    ; ψυχὰς ἡρώων, opp. αὐτούς, 1.3, cf. Hes.Sc. 151;

    ψυχαὶ δ' Ἄϊδόσδε κατῆλθον Il.7.330

    ;

    ψ. δὲ κατ' οὐταμένην ὠτειλὴν ἔσσυτ' ἐπειγομένη 14.518

    ; sts. hardly dist. from signf. 1,

    ἅμα ψ. τε καὶ ἔγχεος ἐξέρυσ' αἰχμήν 16.505

    ; in swoons it leaves the body,

    τὸν δὲ λίπε ψ. 5.696

    ; so in later writers (seldom in Trag.),

    σὺν Ἀγαμεμνονίᾳ ψυχᾷ Pi.P.11.21

    ; ἑὰν ψυχὰν κομίξαι ib.4.159, cf. N.8.44;

    αἱ ψ. ὀσμῶνται καθ' Ἅιδην Heraclit.98

    ;

    πέμψατ' ἔνερθεν ψυχὴν ἐς φῶς A.Pers. 630

     (anap.);

    ποτωμένην ψ. ὑπὲρ σοῦ E.Or. 676

    , cf. Fr. 912.9 (anap.);

    τὰς τῶν κεκμηκότων ψ., αἷς ἐστιν ἐν τῇ φύσει τῶν αὑτῶν ἐκγόνων κήδεσθαι Pl.Lg. 927b

    ; ψ. σοφαί, perh. 'wise ghosts', Ar.Nu. 94;

    δὶς ἀποθανουμένη ψ. Anon.

     ap. Plu.2.236d.
    III the immaterial and immortal soul, first in Pindar,

    ἐς τὸν ὕπερθεν ἅλιον κείνων.. ἀνδιδοῖ [Φερσεφόνα] ψυχὰς πάλιν Fr. 133

    , cf. Pl.Men. 81b;

    εἰπόντες ὡς ἀνθρώπου ψ. ἀθάνατός ἐστι Hdt.2.123

    ;

    ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀθάνατον ψ. Pl.Phdr. 246a

    , cf. Phd. 70c, al.;

    ἀθάνατος ἡμῶν ἡ ψ. καὶ οὐδέποτε ἀπόλλυται Id.R. 608d

    ;

    ἁψ. τῷ σώματι συνέζευκται καὶ καθάπερ ἐν σάματι τέθαπται Philol.14

    , cf. Pl.Cra. 400c: hence freq. opp.

    σῶμα, ψ. καὶ σῶμα X.Mem.1.3.5

    , cf. An.3.2.20;

    ψ. ἢ σῶμα ἢ συναμφότερον, τὸ ὅλον τοῦτο Pl.Alc.1.130a

    ;

    εἰς θηρίου βίον ἀνθρωπίνη ψ. ἀφικνεῖται καὶ ἐκ θηρίου.. πάλιν εἰς ἄνθρωπον Id.Phdr. 249b

    ;

    κατὰ τοὺς Πυθαγορικοὺς μύθους τὴν τυχοῦσαν ψ. εἰς τὸ τυχὸν ἐνδύεσθαι σῶμα Arist.de An. 407b22

    ;

    οὐδὲ τοῦτο ἐπείσθην, ὡς ἡ ψ., ἕως μὲν ἂν ἐν θνητῷ σώματι ᾖ, ζῇ, ὅταν δὲ τούτου ἀπαλλαγῇ, τέθνηκεν X.Cyr.8.7.19

    ;

    ἀνθρώπου γε ψ., ἣ τοῦ θείου μετέχει,.. ὁρᾶται δ' οὐδ' αὐτή Id.Mem.4.3.14

    , cf. Cyr. 8.7.17; αἰθὴρ μὲμ ψυχὰς ὑπεδέξατο, σώ[ματα δὲ χθών] IG12.945 (v B. C.);

    ὁπόταμ ψ. προλίπῃ φάος ἀελίοιο Orph.Fr.32

    f.1;

    ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν ψ., ζῷον ἀθάνατον ἐν θνητῷ καθειργμένον φρουρίῳ Pl.Ax. 365e

    .
    IV the conscious self or personality as centre of emotions, desires, and affections,

    χερσὶ καὶ ψυχᾷ δυνατοί Pi.N.9.39

    ;

    μορφὰν βραχύς, ψυχὰν δ' ἄκαμπτος Id.I.4(3).53(71)

    ;

    ἐνίους τῶν καλῶν τὰς μορφὰς μοχθηροὺς ὄντας τὰς ψ. X.Oec.6.16

    ;

    θνητοῦ σώματος ἔτυχες, πειρῶ τῆς ψ. ἀθάνατον μνήμην καταλιπεῖν Isoc.2.37

    ; opp. material blessings,

    κτεάνων ψ. ἔχοντες κρέσσονας Pi.N.9.32

    ;

    μήτε σωμάτων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι μήτε χρημάτων.. οὕτω σφόδρα ὡς τῆς ψ. ὅπως ὡς ἀρίστη ἔσται Pl.Ap. 30b

    , cf. 29e: hence regarded in abstraction,

    τὸ παρεχόμενον ἡμῶν ἕκαστον τοῦτ' εἶναι μηδὲν ἀλλ' ἢ τὴν ψ., τὸ δὲ σῶμα ἰνδαλλόμενον ἡμῶν ἑκάστοις ἕπεσθαι Pl.Lg. 959a

    ;

    ἡ ψ. ἐστιν ἄνθρωπος Id.Alc.1.130c

    ;

    οὐδὲ νῦν τήν γ ἐμὴν ψ. ἑωρᾶτε X.Cyr.8.7.17

    , cf. supr. 111: sts., therefore, distd. from oneself,

    ψ. γὰρ ηὔδα πολλά μοι μυθουμένη S.Ant. 227

    ;

    ἡ ψ. μου πεπότηται Ar.Nu. 319

     (anap.);

    τί ποτ' ἔστι μαθεῖν ἔραται ψ. E.Hipp. 173

     (anap.);

    ἄλλο τι βουλομένη ἑκατέρου ἡ ψ. δήλη ἐστίν Pl.Smp. 192c

    ; οἴμοι ψυχή woe is me! LXX Mi.7.1; καὶ ἐρῶ τῇ ψ. μου, "yuxh/, e)/xeis polla\ a)gaqa/" Ev.Luc.12.19; in periphrases, ψ. Ὀρέστου, = Ὀρέστης, S.El. 1127, al.: but τὴν Φιλοκτήτου ψ. ἐκκλέψεις his wits, Id.Ph.55;

    ἡ δ' ἐμὴ ψ. τέθνηκεν Id.Ant. 559

    , cf. OC 999; so ψυχαί abs., = ἄνθρωποι, ψ. ὀλέσασα A.Ag. 1457 (lyr.); ψ. πολλαὶ ἔθανον many souls perished, Ar.Th. 864;

    πᾶσαι αἱ ψ., υἱοὶ καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες λ γ LXX Ge.46.15

    , cf. Ex.12.4, al.; [

    κιβωτὸς] εἰς ἣν ὀλίγοι, τοῦτ' ἔστιν ὀκτὼ ψ., διεσώθησαν 1 Ep.Pet.3.20

    . In apostrophe,

    μή, φίλα ψ. Pi.P.3.61

    ;

    ὦ μελέα ψ. S.Ph. 712

     (lyr.);

    ὦ ἀγαθὴ καὶ πιστὴ ψ. X.Cyr.7.3.8

    ; in referring to persons,

    ὅταν μεγάλη ψ. φυῇ Pl.R. 496b

     (cf. μεγαλόψυχος) ; καλεῖται γοῦν ἡ ψ. Κρινοκοράκα the creature, Thphr.Char.28.2;

    πάσῃ ψ. τετελευτηκυίᾳ LXX Nu.6.6

    ,11;

    πᾶσα ψ. ὑποτασσέσθω Ep.Rom.13.1

    , etc.: generally, being, ψυχὴ ζῶσα living creature, LXX Ge.1.24, cf. 20(pl.).
    2 of various aspects of the self, ἐν πολέμοιο μάχαις τλάμονι ψ. παρέμειν ) enduring heart, Pi.P.1.48;

    διεπειρᾶτο αὐτοῦ τῆς ψ. Hdt.3.14

    , ἦν ηὰρ.. ψυχὴν οὐκ ἄκρος poor-spirited, Id.5.124;

    ψυχὴν ἄριστε πάντων Ar.Eq. 457

    ;

    καρτερὰν ψ. λαβεῖν Id.Ach. 393

    ;

    κράτιστοι ἂν τὴν ψ. κριθεῖεν Th.2.40

    ;

    τοῖς σώμασι δύνανται τὰς δὲ ψ. οὐκ ἔχουσιν Lys.10.29

    ;

    ὁ γὰρ' λόγχην ἀκονῶν καὶ τὴν ψ. τι παρακονᾷ X.Cyr.6.2.33

    , cf. Oec.21.3.
    3 of the emotional self,

    ὑπείργασμαι μὲν εὖ ψυχὴν ἔρωτι E.Hipp. 505

    , cf. 527 (lyr.);

    πάνυ μου ἡ ψ. ἐπεθύμει X.Oec.6.14

    ;

    τίνα ποτὲ ψ. ἔχων; Lys.32.12

    ; τίν' οἴεσθ' αὐτὴν ψ. ἕξειν, ὅταν ἐμὲ ῒδῃ; how will she feel? D.28.21; μία ψ., prov. of friends, Arist.EN 1168b7; ψ. μία ἤστην prob. in Phryn. PSp.128B.; of appetite,

    ψυχῇ διδόντες ἡδονήν A.Pers. 841

     (s. v.l.), cf. Epich.297, Theocr.16.24;

    λίχνῳ δὲ ὄντι τὴν ψ. Pl.R. 579b

    ;

    τῷ δὲ ἡ ψ. σῖτον μὲν οὐ προσίετο, διψῆν δ' ἐδόκει X.Cyr.8.7.4

    .
    4 of the moral and intellectual self,

    ἀπὸ πάμπαν ἀδίκων ἔχειν ψ. Pi.O. 2.70

    ;

    ψ. τε καὶ φρόνημα καὶ γνώμην S.Ant. 176

    ;

    ἀρκεῖν.. κἀντὶ μυρίων μίαν ψ. τάδ' ἐκτίνουσαν, ἢν εὔνους παρῇ Id.OC 499

    ;

    ψ. γὰρ εὔνους καὶ φρονοῦσα τοὔνδικον Id.Fr. 101

    ;

    ἡ κακὴ σὴ ψ. Id.Ph. 1014

    ;

    ψυχῆς κατήγορος κακῆς X.Oec.20.15

    , cf. Pl.R. 353e;

    ἡ βουλεύσασα ψ. Antipho 4.1.7

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 873a; τὸ σῶμα ἀπειρηκὸς ἡ ψ. συνεξέσωσεν.. διὰ τὸ μὴ ξυνειδέναι ἑαυτῇ the mind conscious of innocence, Antipho 5.93;

    τὸ ἐπιμελεῖσθαι καὶ ἄρχειν καὶ βουλεύεσθαι.. ἐσθ' ὅτῳ ἄλλῳ ἢ ψυχῇ δικαίως ἂν ἀποδοῖμεν; Pl.R. 353d

    ;

    τὴν τῆς ψ. ἐπιμέλειαν X.Mem. 1.2.4

    , Isoc.15.304; τὰ ἐν τῇ ψ. διὰ τὴν παιδείαν ἐγγιγνόμενα ib.290;

    τῆς ψ. ἐξελθούσης, ἐν ᾗ μόνῃ γίγνεται φρόνησις X.Mem.1.2.53

    ;

    νοῦς τε καὶ ψ. Pl.Cra. 400a

    , cf. Phdr. 247c, al.;

    ἐμπαίει τί μοι ψυχῇ σύνηθες ὄμμα S.El. 903

    ;

    ἰδὼν μὲν γνούς τε σῇ ψ., τέκνον E.Tr. 1171

    . Phrases:—

    ἐκ τῆς ψ. φίλος X.An.7.7.43

    ; ἀπὸ τῆς ψ. φιλεῖν with all the heart, Thphr. Char.17.3;

    βόσκοιτ' ἐκ ψυχᾶς τὰς ἀμνάδας Theoc.8.35

    ;

    ὅλῃ τῇ ψ. κεχαρίσθαι τινί X.Mem.3.11.10

    ; οὐκ ἐᾷ ἡμᾶς οὐδὲ ψυχῆς λαχεῖν he won't let us call our soul our own, Phryn.PSp.128B.
    5 of animals, ψ. μεγαλόφρων, of a horse, X.Eq.11.1;

    θηρίων ψ. ἡμεροῦμεν Isoc.2.12

    ; ψ. χηνός, ὀρτυγίου, Eub.101, Antiph.5.
    6 of inanimate things,

    πᾶσα πολιτεία ψ. πόλεώς ἐστιν Isoc.12.138

    , cf. 7.14;

    ἡ τῶνδε τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἀρετὴ τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἦν ψ. D.60.23

    ;

    οἷον ψ. ὁ μῦθος τῆς τραγῳδίας Arist.Po. 1450a38

    ; also of the spirit of an author, D.H.Lys.11.
    V Philosophical uses:
    1 In the early physicists, of the primary substance, the source of life and consciousness, ὁρίζονται πάντες (sc. οἱ πρότεροι)

    τὴν ψ. τρισίν, κινήσει, αἰσθήσει, τῷ ἀσωμάτῳ Arist.de An. 405b11

    ; τὸν λίθον ἔφη [Θαλῆς] ψ. ἔχειν ὅτι τὸν σίδηρον κινεῖ, of the magnet, ib. 405a20; ψυχῇσιν θάνατος ὕδωρ γενέσθαι, ὕδατι δὲ θάνατος γῆν γενέσθαι, ἐκ γῆς δὲ ὕδωρ γίνεται, ἐξ ὕδατος δὲ ψ. (sc. πῦρ) Heraclit. 36;

    ἡ ψ. πνεῦμα Xenoph.

     ap. D.L.9.19; καρδία ψυχῆς καὶ αἰσθήσιος [ἀρχά] Philol.13;

    τοῦτο [ἀὴρ] αὐτοῖς καὶ ψ. ἐστι καὶ νόησις Diog.

     Apoll.4;

    τὴν τῶν ἄλλων ἁπάντων φύσιν οὐ πιστεύεις Ἀναξαγόρᾳ νοῦν καὶ ψ. εἶναι τὴν διακοσμοῦσαν; Pl.Cra. 400a

    , cf. Arist.de An. 404a25; Δημόκριτος πῦρ τι καὶ θερμόν θησιν αὐτὴν (sc. ψυχὴν) εἶναι ib. 404a1, cf. Resp. 472a4.
    2 the spirit of the universe,

    ψ. εἰς τὸ μέσον [τοῦ κόσμου] θείς Pl.Ti. 34b

    , cf. 30b;

    τὴν τοῦ παντὸς δῆλον ὅτι τοιαύτην εἶναι βούλεται [ὁ Τίμαιος] οἷόν ποτ' ἐστὶν ὁ καλούμενος νοῦς Arist.de An. 407a3

    ; ἐν τῷ ὅλῳ τινὲς [τὴν ψ.] μεμεῖχθαί φασιν, ὅθεν ἴσως καὶ Θαλῆς ᾠήθη πάντα πλήρη θεῶν εἶναι ib. 411a8;

    ὁ κόσμος ψ. ἐστὶν ἑαυτοῦ καὶ ἡγεμονικόν Chrysipp.Stoic.2.186

    ; ψ. [κόσμου] Plu.2.1013e, cf. M.Ant.4.40;

    ψ. ἐλθοῦσα εἰς σῶμα οὐρανοῦ Plot.5.1.2

    ;

    τόδε τὸ πᾶν ψ. μίαν ἔχον εἰς πάντα αὐτοῦ μέρη Id.4.4.32

    ; περὶ ψυχᾶς κόσμου καὶ φύσιος, title of work by Ti.Locr.
    3 In Pl. the immaterial principle of movement and life,

    ὅταν παρῇ [ψυχὴ] τῷ σώματι, αἴτιόν ἐστι τοῦ ζῆν αὐτῷ Pl.Cra. 399d

    , cf. Def. 411c; [

    ψυχῆς λόγον ἔχομεν] τὴν δυναμένην αὐτὴν αὑτὴν κινεῖν κίνησιν Id.Lg. 896a

    ; μεταβολῆς τε καὶ κινήσεως ἁπάσης αἰτία [ἡ ψ.] ἅπασιν ib. b, cf. 892c; its presence is requisite for thought,

    σοφία καὶ νοῦς ἄνευ ψ. οὐκ ἂν γενοίσθην Id.Phlb. 30c

    , cf. Ti. 30b, Sph. 249a; defined by Arist. as

    οὐσία ὡς εἶδος σώματος φυσικοῦ δυνάμει ζωὴν ἔχοντος de An. 412a20

    ; ἐντελέχεια ἡ πρώτη σώματος φυσικοῦ ὀργανικοῦ ib. 412b5; the tripartite division of

    ψ., οἱ δὲ περὶ Πλάτωνα καὶ Ἀρχύτας καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ Πυθαγόρειοι τὴν ψ. τριμερῆ ἀποφαίνονται, διαιροῦντες εἰς λογισμὸν καὶ θυμὸν καὶ ἐπιθυμίαν Iamb.

     ap. Stob.1.49.34, cf. Pl.R. 439e sqq.; in Arist.

    ἡ ψ. τούτοις ὥρισται, θρεπτικῷ, αἰσθητικῷ, διανοητικῷ, κινήσει· πότερον δὲ τοὔτων ἕκαστόν ἐστι ψ. ἢ ψυχῆς μόριον; de An. 413b11

    , cf. PA 641b4;

    ἡ θρεπτικὴ ψ. Id.de An. 434a22

    , al.; in the Stoics and Epicureans, σῶμα ἡ ψ. Zeno and Chrysipp.Stoic.1.38; of the scala naturae,

    τὰ μὲν ἕξει διοικεῖται, τὰ δὲ φύσει, τὰ δ' ἀλόγῳ ψ., τὰ δὲ καὶ λόγον ἐχούσῃ καὶ διάνοιαν Stoic.2.150

    , cf. M.Ant.6.14;

    ἡ ψ. σῶμά ἐστι λεπτομερές.. προσεμφερέστατον πνεύματι θερμοῦ τινα κρᾶσιν ἔχοντι Epicur.Ep.1p.19U.

    ;

    τέλος.. τὸ μήτε ἀλγεῖν κατὰ σῶμα μήτε ταράττεσθαι κατὰ ψ. Id.Ep.3p.64U.

    ; in the Neo-Platonists characterized by discursive thinking,

    τοὺς λογισμοὺς ψυχῆς εἶναι ἐνεργήματα Plot.1.1.7

    ; related to νοῦς as image to archetype, εἰκών τίς ἐστι νοῦ [ψ.] Id.5.1.3; present in entirety in every part,

    πάρεστι πᾶσα πανταχοῦ ψ. Id.5.1.2

    , cf. 4.7.5;

    φύσις ψ. οὖσα, γέννημα ψυχῆς προτέρας Id.3.8.4

    ; animal and vegetable bodies possess

    οἷον σκιὰν ψυχῆς Id.4.4.18

    ;

    πᾶν σῶμα.. ψυχῆς μετουσίᾳ κινεῖται ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ ζῇ διὰ ψ. Procl.Inst.20

    .
    VI butterfly or moth, Arist.HA 551a14, Thphr.HP2.4.4, Plu.2.636c.
    2 τριπόλιον, Ps.-Dsc.4.132.
    VII Psyche, in the allegory of Psyche and Eros, Apul.Metam. bks. 4-6, Aristophontes ap. Fulg.Myth.3.6. (See ancient speculations on the derivation, Pl.Cra. 399d- 400a, Arist.de An. 405b29, Chrysipp.Stoic.2.222; Hom. usage gives little support to the derivation from ψύχω 'blow, breathe';

    τὸν δὲ λίπε ψ. Il.5.696

     means 'his spirit left his body', and so λειποψυχέω means 'swoon', not 'become breathless';

    ἀπὸ δὲ ψ. ἐκάπυσσε Il.22.467

     means 'she gasped out her spirit', viz. 'swooned'; the resemblance of ἄμπνυτο 'recovered consciousness' to ἀμπνέω 'recover breath' is deceptive, v. ἄμπνυτο, ἔμπνυτο: when concrete the Homeric ψ. is rather warm blood than breath, cf. Il.14.518, 16.505, where the ψ. escapes through a wound; cf. ψυχοπότης, ψυχορροφέω, and S.El. 786, Ar.Nu. 712 (v. supr.1).)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ψυχή

  • 9 διά

    διά prep. w. gen. and acc. (Hom.+) (for lit. s. ἀνά, beg.); the fundamental idea that finds expression in this prep. is separation, esp. in the gen., with the gener. sense ‘through’; in the acc. the gener. sense also is ‘through’ (cp. the semantic range in Eng.), but primarily with a causal focus ‘owing to’.
    A. w. gen.
    ① marker of extension through an area or object, via, through
    ⓐ w. verbs of going διέρχεσθαι διὰ πάντων (sc. τόπων, EpArist 132) go through all the places Ac 9:32; cp. Mt 12:43; Lk 11:24. ἀπελεύσομαι διʼ ὑμῶν εἰς I will go through your city on the way to Ro 15:28; cp. 2 Cor. 1:16. διαβαίνειν Hb 11:29. διαπορεύεσθαι διὰ σπορίμων Lk 6:1. εἰσέρχεσθαι διὰ τῆς πύλης (Jos., Ant. 13, 229) Mt 7:13a; τ. θύρας J 10:1f; cp. vs. 9. παρέρχεσθαι διὰ τ. ὁδοῦ pass by along the road Mt 8:28; cp. 7:13b. παραπορεύεσθαι Mk 2:23; 9:30. περιπατεῖν διὰ τοῦ φωτός walk about through or in the light Rv 21:24. ὑποστρέφειν διὰ Μακεδονίας return through M. Ac 20:3.—Ἰης. ὁ ἐλθὼν διʼ ὕδατος καὶ αἵματος 1J 5:6 first of all refers quite literally to Jesus’ passing through water at the hand of John and through blood at his death (on the expression ‘come through blood’ in this sense cp. Eur., Phoen. 20 in Alex. Aphr., Fat. 31 II 2 p. 202, 10, of the oracle to Laius the father of Oedipus, concerning the bloody downfall of his house: πᾶς σὸς οἶκος βήσεται διʼ αἵματος). But mng. 3c may also apply: Jesus comes with the water of baptism and with the blood of redemption for his own.—AKlöpper, 1J 5:6–12: ZWT 43, 1900, 378–400.—The ῥῆμα ἐκπορευόμενον διὰ στόματος θεοῦ Mt 4:4 (Dt 8:3) is simply the word that proceeds out of the mouth of God (cp. Theognis 1, 18 Diehl3 τοῦτʼ ἔπος ἀθανάτων ἦλθε διὰ στομάτων; Pittacus in Diog. L. 1, 78 διὰ στόματος λαλεῖ; Chrysippus argues in Diog. L. 7, 187: εἴ τι λαλεῖς, τοῦτο διὰ τοῦ στόματός σου διέρχεται, i.e. if one e.g. says the word ἅμαξα, a wagon passes through the person’s lips; TestIss 7:4 ψεῦδος οὐκ ἀνῆλθε διὰ τ. χειλέων μου. Cp. also δέχεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος Gen 33:10 beside δέχ. ἐκ τ. χειρ. τινος Ex 32:4).
    ⓑ w. other verbs that include motion: οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος διὰ πασῶν τ. ἐκκλησιῶν (sc. ἀγγέλλεται) throughout all the congregations 2 Cor 8:18. διαφέρεσθαι διʼ (v.l. καθʼ) ὅλης τῆς χώρας be spread through the whole region Ac 13:49. διὰ τ. κεράμων καθῆκαν αὐτόν they let him down through the tile roof Lk 5:19. διὰ τοῦ τείχους καθῆκαν through an opening in the wall (Jos., Ant. 5, 15) Ac 9:25; cp. 2 Cor 11:33. (σωθήσεται) ὡς διὰ πυρός as if he had come through fire 1 Cor 3:15. διασῴζεσθαι διʼ ὕδατος be brought safely through the water 1 Pt 3:20.—διʼ ὅλου J 19:23 s. ὅλος 2.
    ⓐ of a whole period of time, to its very end throughout, through, during διὰ παντός (sc. χρόνου. Edd. gener. write διὰ παντός, but Tdf. writes διαπαντός exc. Mt 18:10) always, continually, constantly (Hdt. 1, 122, 3; Thu. 1, 38, 1; Vett. Val. 220, 1; 16; PLond I, 42, 6 [172 B.C.] p. 30; BGU 1078, 2; PGM 7, 235; LXX; GrBar 10:7; EpArist index; Jos., Ant. 3, 281; SibOr Fgm. 1, 17; Just., D. 6, 2; 12, 3 al.) Mt 18:10; Mk 5:5; Lk 24:53; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8); 10:2; 24:16; Ro 11:10 (Ps 68:24); 2 Th 3:16; Hb 9:6; 13:15; Hm 5, 2, 3; Hs 9, 27, 3. διὰ νυκτός during the night, overnight (νύξ 1b) Ac 23:31. διʼ ὅλης νυκτός the whole night through Lk 5:5; J 21:6 v.l. (X., An. 4, 2, 4; Diod S 3, 12, 3 διʼ ὅλης τῆς νυκτός; PGM 4, 3151; Jos., Ant. 6, 37; cp. διʼ ἡμέρας all through the day: IPriene 112, 61 and 99; 1 Macc 12:27; 4 Macc 3:7). διʼ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα Ac 1:3 means either for forty days (Philo, Vi. Cont. 35 διʼ ἓξ ἡμερῶν. So AFridrichsen, ThBl 6, 1927, 337–41; MEnslin, JBL 47, 1928, 60–73) or (s. b below) now and then in the course of 40 days (B-D-F §223, 1; Rob. 581; WMichaelis, ThBl 4, 1925, 102f; Bruce, Acts). διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν throughout the lifetime Hb 2:15 (cp. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ βίου: X., Mem. 1, 2, 61; Pla., Phileb. 39e; Dionys. Hal. 2, 21; διʼ ὅλου τοῦ ζῆν EpArist 130; 141; 168).
    ⓑ of a period of time within which someth. occurs during, at (PTebt 48, 10) διὰ (τῆς) νυκτός at night, during the night (Palaeph. 1, 10; PRyl 138, 15 κατέλαβα τοῦτον διὰ νυκτός; Jos., Bell. 1, 229. S. νύξ 1b end) Ac 5:19; 16:9; 17:10. διὰ τῆς ἡμέρας during the day Lk 9:37 D (Antig. Car. 128 διὰ πέμπτης ἡμέρας=on the fifth day). διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν within three days Mt 26:61; Mk 14:58.
    ⓒ of an interval of time, after (Hdt. 6, 118, 3 διʼ ἐτέων εἴκοσι; Thu. 2, 94, 3; X., Mem. 2, 8, 1; Diod S 5, 28, 6 of transmigration of souls: διʼ ἐτῶν ὡρισμένων [=after the passing of a certain number of years] πάλιν βιοῦν; OGI 56, 38; 4 Macc 13:21; Jos., Ant. 4, 209): διʼ ἐτῶν πλειόνων after several years Ac 24:17. διὰ δεκατεσσάρων (s. under δέκα) ἐτῶν after 14 years Gal 2:1. διʼ ἡμερῶν several days afterward Mk 2:1. διὰ ἱκανοῦ χρόνου after (quite) some time Ac 11:2 D (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 28 διὰ χρόνου).
    ③ marker of instrumentality or circumstance whereby someth. is accomplished or effected, by, via, through
    ⓐ of means or instrument γράφειν διά χάρτου καὶ μέλανος write w. paper and ink 2J 12; cp. 3J 13 (Plut., Sol. 87 [17, 3]). διὰ πυρὸς δοκιμάζειν test by fire 1 Pt 1:7. διὰ χρημάτων κτᾶσθαι Ac 8:20. Hebraistically in expr. denoting activity διὰ χειρῶν τινος (LXX) Mk 6:2; Ac 5:12; 14:3; 19:11, 26. Differently γράφειν διὰ χειρός τινος write through the agency of someone 15:23; cp. 11:30. εἰπεῖν διὰ στόματός τινος by the mouth of someone (where the usage discussed in A1a is influential) 1:16; 3:18, 21; 4:25. εὔσημον λόγον διδόναι διὰ τῆς γλώσσης utter intelligible speech with the tongue 1 Cor 14:9. διὰ τοῦ νοὸς λαλεῖν speak, using one’s reason (=consciously; opp., ecstatic speech) vs. 19 v.l. Of the work of Christ: περιποιεῖσθαι διὰ τοῦ αἵματος obtain through his blood Ac 20:28; cp. Eph 1:7; Col 1:20. Also διὰ τοῦ θανάτου Ro 5:10; Col 1:22; Hb 2:14; διὰ τοῦ σώματος Ro 7:4; διὰ τῆς ἰδίας σαρκός AcPlCor 2:6; cp. 2:15; διὰ τοῦ σταυροῦ Eph 2:16; διὰ τῆς θυσίας Hb 9:26; διὰ τῆς προσφορᾶς τοῦ σώματος Ἰησοῦ through the offering of the body of Jesus 10:10; διὰ παθημάτων 2:10.
    ⓑ of manner, esp. w. verbs of saying: ἀπαγγέλλειν διὰ λόγου by word of mouth Ac 15:27; cp. 2 Th 2:15. διʼ ἐπιστολῶν by letter (POxy 1066, 9; 1070, 14f πολλάκις σοι γράψας διὰ ἐπιστολῶν πολλῶν; Tat. 12:3 δια γραφῆς in writing) 1 Cor 16:3; 2 Cor 10:11; cp. 2 Th 2:2, 15. διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ w. many words Ac 15:32. διʼ ὁράματος εἰπεῖν in a vision 18:9. διὰ παραβολῆς in an illustrative way, in a parable Lk 8:4. διὰ προσευχῆς καὶ δεήσεως προσεύχεσθαι call on (God) w. prayer and supplication Eph 6:18. διὰ βραχέων ἐπιστέλλειν write briefly Hb 13:22 (cp. 1 Pt 5:12 P72; Isocr. 14, 3; Lucian, Tox. 56; EpArist 128; Ath. 17:1 σκέψασθε … διὰ βρ.). Also διʼ ὀλίγων γράφειν 1 Pt 5:12 (Pla., Phileb. 31d; UPZ 42, 9 [162 B.C.]; 2 Macc 6:17).
    ⓒ of attendant or prevailing circumstance (Kühner-G. I 482f; X., Cyr. 4, 6, 6 διὰ πένθους τὸ γῆρας διάγων; Just., D. 105, 2 διʼ οὗ πάθους ἔμελλενἀποθνῄσκειν; PTebt 35, 9 [111 B.C.] διὰ τῆς γνώμης τινός=with someone’s consent; Jos., Bell. 4, 105) σὲ τὸν διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς παραβάτην νόμου you who, (though provided) with the written code and circumcision, are a transgressor/violator of the law Ro 2:27. διʼ ὑπομονῆς 8:25. διὰ προσκόμματος eat with offense (to the scruples of another) 14:20. διʼ ἀκροβυστίας in a state of being uncircumcised 4:11. διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων with many tears 2 Cor 2:4. Cp. 6:7. διὰ τῆς ἐπιγνώσεως 2 Pt 1:3 ( through recognition [of God as source of the gifts], s. Danker, Benefactor 457). διὰ πυρός in fiery form AcPlCor 2:13.—Here prob. belongs σωθήσεται διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 Ti 2:15 (opp. of the negative theme in Gen. 3:16), but s. d next. On 1J 5:6 s. A1a above.
    ⓓ of efficient cause via, through διὰ νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας ( only) recognition of sin comes via the law Ro 3:20; cp. 4:13. τὰ παθήματα τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου passions aroused via the law 7:5. διὰ νόμου πίστεως by the law of faith 3:27; Gal 2:19. ἀφορμὴν λαμβάνειν διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς Ro 7:8, 11; cp. 13. διὰ τ. εὐαγγελίου ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα (spiritual parenthood) 1 Cor 4:15. Perh. 1 Ti 2:15 but s. c, above. διὰ τῆς σοφίας with its wisdom 1 Cor 1:21; opp. διὰ τῆς μωρίας τοῦ κηρύγματος through the folly of proclamation = foolish proclamation ibid. διὰ τῆς Λευιτικῆς ἱερωσύνης Hb 7:11. Freq. διὰ (τῆς) πίστεως Ro 1:12; 3:22, 25, 30f; Gal 2:16; 3:14, 26; Eph 2:8; 3:12, 17 al. Cp. AcPl Cor 2:8. πίστις διʼ ἀγάπης ἐνεργουμένη faith which works through (=expresses itself in) deeds of love Gal 5:6. διὰ θελήματος θεοῦ if God is willing Ro 15:32; by the will of God 1 Cor 1:1; 2 Cor 1:1; 8:5; Eph 1:1; Col 1:1; 2 Ti 1:1.
    ⓔ of occasion διὰ τῆς χάριτος by virtue of the grace Ro 12:3; Gal 1:15 (Just., D. 100, 2).—3:18; 4:23; Phlm 22. διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀρετῆς in consequence of his glory and excellence 2 Pt 1:3 v.l.
    ⓕ in wording of urgent requests διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ θεοῦ by the mercy of God Ro 12:1; cp. 15:30; 1 Cor 1:10; 2 Cor 10:1.
    ④ marker of pers. agency, through, by
    ⓐ with focus on agency through ( the agency of), by (X., An. 2, 3, 17 διʼ ἑρμηνέως λέγειν; Menand., Fgm. 210, 1 οὐθεὶς διʼ ἀνθρώπου θεὸς σῴζει … ἑτέρου τόν ἕτερον; Achilles Tat. 7, 1, 3 διʼ ἐκείνου μαθεῖν; Just., D. 75, 4 διὰ παρθένου γεννηθῆναι; PMert 5, 8 γεομετρηθῆναι διʼ αὐτοῦ) ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Mt 1:22; 2:15, 23; 4:14 al. (cp. Just., A I, 47, 5 διὰ Ἠσαίου τοῦ πρ.). γεγραμμένα διὰ τῶν προφητῶν Lk 18:31; cp. Ac 2:22; 10:36; 15:12 al. διʼ ἀνθρώπου by human agency Gal 1:1. διὰ Μωϋσέως through Moses (Jos., Ant. 7, 338; Mel., P. 11, 77 διὰ χειρὸς Μωυσέως) J 1:17; under Moses’ leadership Hb 3:16. διʼ ἀγγέλων by means of divine messengers (TestJob 18:5 διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 136, but s. n. by RMarcus, Loeb ed., ad loc.) Gal 3:19; Hb 2:2. πέμψας διὰ τ. μαθητῶν εἶπεν sent and said through his disciples Mt 11:2f. Cp. the short ending of Mk. γράφειν διά τινος of the bearer IRo 10:1; IPhld 11:2; ISm 12:1, but also of pers. who had a greater or smaller part in drawing up some document (Dionys. of Cor. in Eus., HE 4, 23, 11) 1 Pt 5:12 (on the practice s. ERichards, The Secretary in the Letters of Paul ’91). In this case διά comes close to the mng. represented by (LWenger, D. Stellvertretung im Rechte d. Pap. 1906, 9ff; Dssm., LO 98 [LAE 123f]). So also κρίνει ὁ θεὸς διὰ Χρ. Ἰ. God judges, represented by Christ Jesus Ro 2:16. Christ as intermediary in the creation of the world J 1:3, 10; 1 Cor 8:6; Col 1:16.—εὐχαριστεῖν τ. θεῷ διὰ Ἰ. Χρ. thank God through Jesus Christ Ro 1:8; 7:25; Col 3:17.—Occasionally the mediation becomes actual presence (references for this usage in BKeil, Anonymus Argentinensis 1902, p. 192, 1; 306 note) διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων in the presence of many witnesses 2 Ti 2:2 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 114, 31 διὰ θεοῦ μέσου=in the presence of God as mediator; Philo, Leg. ad Gai. 187 τὸ διὰ μαρτύρων κλαίειν=weeping in the presence of witnesses).
    ⓑ with focus on the originator of an action (Hom. et al.; pap, LXX, EpArist)
    α. of human activity (PSI 354, 6 [254 B.C.] τὸν χόρτον τὸν συνηγμένον διʼ ἡμῶν=by us; 500, 5; 527, 12; 1 Esdr 6:13; 2 Macc 6:21; 4 Macc 1:11) 2 Cor 1:11 (where διὰ πολλῶν resumes ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων). ᾧ παρέλαβε κανόνι διὰ τῶν μακαρίων προφήτων καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου εὐαγγελίου AcPlCor 2:36.
    β. of divine activity:—of God (Aeschyl., Ag. 1485; Pla., Symp. 186e ἡ ἰατρικὴ πᾶσα διὰ τ. θεοῦ τούτου [Asclepius] κυβερνᾶται; Ael. Aristid., Sarap. [Or. 8 Dind.=45 Keil] 14 K. πάντα γὰρ πανταχοῦ διὰ σοῦ τε καὶ διὰ σὲ ἡμῖν γίγνεται; Zosimus in CALG p. 143 and a magic ring in introd. 133; EpArist 313) 1 Cor 1:9 διʼ οὗ ἐκλήθητε (v.l. ὑπό s. καλέω 4); Ro 11:36 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 240–50; 347f); Hb 2:10b (s. B 2a, below; cp. Ar. 1:5 διʼ αὐτοῦ … τὰ πάντα συνέστηκεν).—Of Christ Ro 1:5; 5:9, 17f, 21; 8:37; 2 Cor 1:20 al. (ASchettler, D. paulin. Formel ‘durch Christus’ 1907; GJonker, De paulin. formule ‘door Christus’: ThSt 27, 1909, 173–208).—Of the Holy Spirit Ac 11:28; 21:4; Ro 5:5.
    ⑤ At times διά w. gen. seems to have causal mng. (Rdm. 142; POxy 299, 2 [I A.D.] ἔδωκα αὐτῷ διὰ σοῦ=because of you; Achilles Tat. 3, 4, 5 διὰ τούτων=for this reason; in Eng. cp. Coleridge, Anc. Mariner 135–36: Every tongue thro’ utter drouth Was wither’d at the root, s. OED s.v. ‘through’ I B 8) διὰ τῆς σαρκός because of the resistance of the flesh Ro 8:3.—2 Cor 9:13.—On the use of διά w. gen. in Ro s. Schlaeger, La critique radicale de l’épître aux Rom.: Congr. d’ Hist. du Christ. II 111f.
    B. w. acc.
    ① marker of extension through an area, through (Hom. and other early Gk. only in poetry, e.g. Pind. P. 9, 123 διʼ ὅμιλον ‘through the throng’; Hellenistic prose since Dionys. Hal. [JKäser, D. Präpositionen b. Dionys. Hal., diss. Erlangen 1915, 54]; ISyriaW 1866b τὸν πάτρωνα διὰ πάντα of the governor of a whole province) διήρχετο διὰ μέσον Σαμαρείας καὶ Γαλιλαίας Lk 17:11 (cp. SibOr 3, 316 ῥομφαία διελεύσεται διὰ μέσον σεῖο).
    ② marker of someth. constituting cause
    ⓐ the reason why someth. happens, results, exists: because of, for the sake of (do something for the sake of a divinity: UPZ 62, 2 [161 B.C.] διὰ τὸν Σάραπιν; JosAs 1:10 διʼ αὐτήν; ApcSed 3:3 διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον; Tat. 8:2 διὰ τὸν … Ἄττιν; Ath. 30, 1 διὰ τὴν Δερκετώ) hated because of the name Mt 10:22; persecution arises because of teaching 13:21; because of unbelief vs. 58; because of a tradition 15:3; διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον (the sabbath was designed) for people Mk 2:27; because of Herodias Mk 6:17 (cp. Just. D. 34, 8 διὰ γυναῖκα); because of a crowd Lk 5:19; 8:19 al; because of Judeans Ac 16:3. διὰ τὸν θόρυβον 21:34; because of rain 28:2. Juristically to indicate guilt: imprisoned for insurrection and murder Lk 23:25. διʼ ὑμᾶς on your account=through your fault Ro 2:24 (Is 52:5). διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν because of the passing over 3:25 (but s. WKümmel, ZTK 49, ’52, 164). διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα on account of transgressions 4:25a (cp. Is 53:5; PsSol 13:5); but διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν in the interest of justification vs. 25b; s. 8:10 for a sim. paired use of διὰ. διὰ τὴν χάριν on the basis of the grace 15:15. διʼ ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκός because of a physical ailment (cp. POxy 726, 10f [II A.D.] οὐ δυνάμενος διʼ ἀσθένειαν πλεῦσαι. Cp. ἀσθένεια 1) Gal 4:13. διὰ τὸ θέλημα σου by your will Rv 4:11. διὰ τὸν χρόνον according to the time = by this time Hb 5:12 (Aelian, VH 3, 37 δ. τὸν χρ.=because of the particular time-situation).—W. words denoting emotions out of (Diod S 5, 59, 8 διὰ τὴν λύπην; 18, 25, 1 διὰ τὴν προπέτειαν=out of rashness; Appian, Celt. 1 §9 διʼ ἐλπίδα; 2 Macc 5:21; 7:20; 9:8; 3 Macc 5:32, 41; Tob 8:7): διὰ φθόνον out of envy Mt 27:18; Phil 1:15. διὰ σπλάγχνα ἐλέους out of tender mercy Lk 1:78. διὰ τ. φόβον τινός out of fear of someone J 7:13. διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην out of the great love Eph 2:4. διὰ τ. πλεονεξίαν in their greediness B 10:4.—Of God as the ultimate goal or purpose of life, whereas διά w. gen. (s. A4bβ above) represents God as Creator, Hb 2:10a (s. Norden, op. cit.; PGM 13, 76 διὰ σὲ συνέστηκεν … ἡ γῆ). Cp. J 6:57 (s. Bultmann ad loc.) PtK 2.
    ⓑ in direct questions διὰ τί; why? (Hyperid. 3, 17; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 28; Ael. Aristid. 31 p. 597 D.; oft. LXX; TestJob 37:8; TestLevi 2:9; GrBar, Tat; Mel., Fgm. 8b, 42) mostly in an interrogative clause Mt 9:11, 14; 13:10; 15:2f; 17:19; 21:25; Mk 2:18; 11:31; Lk 5:30; 19:23, 31; 20:5; 24:38; J 7:45; 8:43, 46; 12:5; 13:37; Ac 5:3; 1 Cor 6:7; Rv 17:7. Simply διὰ τί; (Hyperid. 3, 23) Ro 9:32; 2 Cor 11:11. Also διατί (always in t.r. and often by Tdf.; TestJob 46:2) B 8:4, 6; Hm 2:5; Hs 5, 5, 5. Kvan Leeuwen Boomkamp, Τι et Διατι dans les évangiles: RevÉtGr 39, 1926, 327–31.—In real and supposed answers and inferences διὰ τοῦτο therefore (X., An. 1, 7, 3; 7, 19; oft. LXX; JosAs 7:7; Ar. 12, 2; Just., A I, 44, 5 al.; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac.) Mt 6:25; 12:27, 31; 13:13, 52; 14:2; 18:23; 21:43; 23:13 v.l.; 24:44; Mk 11:24; 12:24; Lk 11:19 al. Also διὰ ταῦτα (Epict.) Eph 5:6. διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι for this reason, (namely) that J 5:16, 18; 8:47; 10:17; 12:18, 39; 15:19; 1J 3:1. διὰ τοῦτο ἵνα for this reason, (in order) that (Lucian, Abdic. 1) J 1:31; 2 Cor 13:10; 1 Ti 1:16; Phlm 15. Also διὰ τοῦτο ὅπως Hb 9:15.
    ⓒ διά foll. by inf. or acc. w. inf., representing a causal clause, because (Gen 39:9; Dt 1:36; 1 Macc 6:53; GrBar 8:4; Demetr.: 722 fgm 1:1 al.) διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν βάθος because it had no depth Mt 13:5f; Mk 4:5f (διὰ τὸ μή w. inf.: X., Mem. 1, 3, 5; Hero Alex. I 348, 7; III 274, 19; Lucian, Hermot. 31); because lawlessness increases Mt 24:12; διὰ τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐξ οἴκου Δ.. Lk 2:4; because it was built well 6:48 al. διὰ τὸ λέγεσθαι ὑπό τινων because it was said by some Lk 9:7 (for the constr. cp. Herodian 7, 12, 7 διὰ τὸ τὰς ἐξόδους ὑπὸ τ. πυρὸς προκατειλῆφθαι=because the exit-routes were blocked by the fire).
    ⓓ instead of διά w. gen. to denote the efficient cause we may have διά, by
    α. w. acc. of thing (schol. on Pind., N. 4, 79a; 2 Macc 12:11; EpArist 77) διὰ τὸ αἷμα by the blood Rv 12:11. διὰ τὰ σημεῖα by the miracles 13:14.
    β. w. acc. of pers. and freq. as expr. of favorable divine action (Aristoph., Plut. 468; Dionys. Hal. 8, 33, 3, 1579 μέγας διὰ τ. θεούς ἐγενόμην; Ael. Aristid. 24, 1 K.=44 p. 824 D.: διʼ οὓς [= θεούς] ἐσώθην; SIG 1122; OGI 458, 40; PGM 13, 579 διῳκονομήθη τ. πάντα διὰ σέ; EpArist 292; Sir 15:11; 3 Macc 6:36: other exx. in SEitrem and AFridrichsen, E. christl. Amulett auf Pap. 1921, 24). ζῶ διὰ τὸν πατέρα J 6:57 (cp. PKöln VI, 245, 16 of Isis σὺ κυρεῖς τὰ πάντα, διὰ σὲ δʼ εἰσορῶ φαός ‘you are responsible for everything and thanks to you I can see light’). διὰ τὸν ὑποτάξαντα by the one who subjected it Ro 8:20.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > διά

  • 10 ὅς

    ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
    ① as relative pron. who, which, what, that (Hom.+). On its use s. B-D-F §293–97; 377–80; Rydbeck 98–118; W-S. §24; Rob. 711–26, and for ancient Gk. in gener. Kühner-G. II 399ff; Schwyzer II 639–41.
    ⓐ As a general rule, the relative pron. agrees in gender and number w. the noun or pron. to which it refers (i.e. its antecedent); its case is determined by the verb, noun, or prep. that governs it: ὁ ἀστήρ, ὸ̔ν εἶδον Mt 2:9. ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ὅν ἐγὼ καταγγέλλω ὑμῖν Ac 17:3. Ἰουδαῖον, ᾧ (sc. ἦν) ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 13:6. ὁ Ἰουδαῖος …, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος Ro 2:29. Ἰσραηλίτης, ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν J 1:47. οὗτος, περὶ οὗ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα Lk 9:9 and very oft.
    ⓑ A demonstrative pron. is freq. concealed within the relative pron.:
    α. in such a way that both pronouns stand in the same case: ὅς the one who ὅς οὐ λαμβάνει Mt 10:38; sim. Mk 4:9; 9:40 (the three w. implied condition). οὗ of the one whose J 18:26. ᾧ to the one to whom Ro 6:16. ὅν the one whom (or someth. sim.) Mk 15:12; J 1:45. οἷς to those for whom Mt 20:23. οὕς those whom Mk 3:13; J 5:21. ὅ that which, what Mt 10:27.—A prep. governing the relative belongs in certain pass. to the (omitted) demonstr. pron. alone: παρʼ ὅ Ro 12:3; Gal 1:8; ὑπὲρ ὅ (ἅ) 1 Cor 10:13; 2 Cor 12:6; Phlm 21; πρὸς ἅ 2 Cor 5:10; εἰς ὅν J 6:29. In others it must be added to both pronouns: ἐν ᾧ in that in which 2 Cor 11:12; 1 Pt 2:12; 3:16 (these passages in 1 Pt may be classed under 1kγ also). ἐν οἷς Phil 4:11. ὑπὲρ οὑ because of that for which 1 Cor 10:30. ἀφʼ ὧν from the persons from whom 2 Cor 2:3.—The much disputed pass. ἑταῖρε, ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 would belong here if we were to supply the words necessary to make it read about as follows: friend, (are you misusing the kiss) for that (purpose) for which you are here? (Wlh.; EKlostermann) or thus: in connection with that (=the purposes), for which (=for the realization of which) you have appeared (do you kiss me)? (Rdm.2 78). Friend, are you here for this purpose? FRehkopf, ZNW 52, ’61, 109–15. But s. βב and iβ below.
    β. But the two pronouns can also stand in different cases; in such instances the demonstr. pron. is nearly always in the nom. or acc.
    א. in the nom. οὗ one whose Ac 13:25. ὧν those whose Ro 4:7 (Ps 31:1). ᾧ the one to or for whom Lk 7:43; 2 Pt 1:9. οἷς those to whom Mt 19:11; Ro 15:21 (Is 52:15). ὅ that (nom.) which (acc.) Mt 13:12; 25:29; 26:13; Mk 11:23; Lk 12:3. Likew. ἅ Lk 12:20. ὅν he whom J 3:34; 4:18; Ac 10:21. ἐφʼ ὅν the one about whom Hb 7:13.
    ב. in the acc. ὧν the things of which J 13:29. ᾧ the one (in) whom 2 Ti 1:12. So also w. a prep.: ἐν ᾧ anything by which Ro 14:21. ἐν οἷς things in which 2 Pt 2:12. ἐφʼ ὅ that upon which Lk 5:25. περὶ ὧν the things of which Ac 24:13. ἐφʼ οἷς from the things of which Ro 6:21 (this passage perh. uses a commercial metaphor, for pap s. Mayser II/2, 434f §121). εἰς ὸ̔ν the one in whom Ro 10:14a.—So Mt 26:50 (s. bα above), if the words to be supplied are about as follows: friend, (do that) for which you have come! (so ESchwartz, ByzZ 25, 1925, 154f; EOwen, JTS 29, 1928, 384–86; WSpiegelberg, ZNW 28, 1929, 341–43; FZorell, VD 9, 1929, 112–16; sim. PMaas, Byz.-Neugriech. Jahrb. 8, ’31, 99; 9, ’32, 64; WEltester: OCullmann Festschr., ’62, 70–91; but s. iβ end.—S. Jos., Bell. 2, 615 at πάρειμι 1a).
    ג. Only in isolated instances does the demonstr. pron. to be supplied stand in another case: οὗ = τούτῳ, οὗ in him of whom Ro 10:14b. παρʼ ὧν = τούτοις, παρʼ ὧν Lk 6:34.
    ⓒ Constructions peculiar in some respect
    α. The pleonastic use of the pers. pron. after ὅς (Mlt. 94f; B-D-F §297) γυνὴ ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς Mk 7:25 is found in older Gk. (Hyperid., Euxen. 3 ὧν … τούτων.—Kühner-G. II 433f), and is not unknown in later Gk. (POxy 117, 15), but above all is suggested by Semitic languages (LXX; GrBar 2:1; Thackeray 46; JHudson, ET 53, ’41/42, 266f); the omission of αὐτῆς in the v.l. is in line w. Gk. usage. οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ Mt 3:12; Lk 3:17. οὗ … τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ Mk 1:7; Lk 3:16. οὗ τῷ μώλωπι αὐτοῦ 1 Pt 2:24 v.l. οὗ καὶ πολλὰ αὐτοῦ συγγράματα EpilMosq 2. In a quot. ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται … ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 = Am 9:12. οὗ ἡ πνοὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 21:9. Esp. freq. in Rv 3:8; 7:2, 9; 9:11 v.l.; 13:8, 12; 20:8.
    β. constructions ‘ad sensum’
    א. a relative in the sing. refers to someth. in the pl. οὐρανοῖς … ἐξ οὗ (οὐρανοῦ) Phil 3:20.
    ב. a relative in the pl. refers to a sing. (Jdth 4:8 γερουσία, οἵ) πλῆθος πολύ …, οἳ ἦλθον Lk 6:17f. κατὰ πόλιν πᾶσαν, ἐν αἷς Ac 15:36. Cp. ἤδη δευτέραν ἐπιστολήν, ἐν αἷς (i.e. ἐν ταῖς δυσὶν ἐπιστ.) 2 Pt 3:1.
    ג. the relative conforms to the natural gender rather than the grammatical gender of its antecedent noun τέκνα μου, οὕς Gal 4:19; cp. 2 J 1; Phlm 10. ἔθνη, οἵ Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); cp. 26:17. παιδάριον, ὅς J 6:9. θηρίον, ὅς Rv 13:14. ὀνόματα, οἵ 3:4 v.l. γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς, ἐν οἷς Phil 2:15. W. ref. to Christ, τὴν κεφαλήν, ἐξ οὗ Col 2:19.
    ⓓ Attraction (or assimilation) of the relative. Just as in Hdt. and freq. Att., ins, pap, LXX, the simple relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ is somet. attracted to the case of its antecedent, even though the relationship of the relative within its own clause would demand a different case.
    α. In most instances it is the acc. of the rel. that is attracted to the gen. or dat. of the antecedent: περὶ πράγματος οὗ ἐὰν αἰτήσωνται Mt 18:19. τῆς διαθήκης ἧς ὁ θεὸς διέθετο Ac 3:25. Cp. Mt 24:50b; Mk 7:13; Lk 2:20; 3:19; 5:9; 9:43; 15:16; J 4:14; 7:31; 15:20; 17:5; 21:10; Ac 1:1; 2:22; 22:10; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 1:6; 10:8, 13; Eph 2:10; 2 Th 1:4; Jd 15 al.—When the antecedent is an understood but unexpressed demonstr. pron. (s. b, beg.) that would stand in the gen. or dat., the acc. of a relative pron. can be attracted to this gen. or dat.: οὐδὲν ὧν ἑώρακαν is really οὐδὲν τούτων ἃ ἑώρακαν Lk 9:36 (Schwyzer II 641); ἅ takes on the case of τούτων which, in turn, is omitted (so already Soph., Pla., et al.).—23:14, 41; Ac 8:24; 21:19, 24; 22:15; 25:11; 26:16; Ro 15:18; 1 Cor 7:1; Eph 3:20; Hb 5:8. ὧν = τούτων, οὕς J 17:9; 2 Cor 12:17. οἷς = τούτοις, ἅ Lk 24:25.
    β. The dat. of the relative is less frequently attracted (B-D-F §294, 2; Rob. 717) ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς (=ᾗ) ἀνελήμφθη Ac 1:22 (cp. Lev 23:15; 25:50; Bar 1:19); Eph 1:6; 4:1; 1 Ti 4:6 v.l.; κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ = κατέν. τοῦ θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστ. Ro 4:17. διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα 2 Cor 1:4.
    γ. In relative clauses that consist of subject, predicate, and copula, the relative pron. somet. agrees in gender and number not w. the noun to which it refers, but w. the predicate if it is the subj. and, conversely, w. the subj. if it is the pred. of its own clause: πνεύματι …, ὅς ἐστιν ἀρραβών Eph 1:14 v.l. τῷ σπέρματί σου, ὅς ἐστιν Χριστός Gal 3:16. τὴν μάχαιραν τοῦ πνεύματος, ὅ ἐστιν ῥῆμα θεοῦ Eph 6:17.—Rv 4:5; 5:8.
    δ. Inverse attraction occurs when the relative pronoun attracts its antecedent to its own case (as early as Hom.; also Soph., Oed. Rex 449; s. Kühner-G. II 413; Schwyzer II 641; B-D-F §295; Rob. 717f); τὸν ἄρτον ὸ̔ν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία … ἐστιν; = ὁ ἄρτος ὅν … 1 Cor 10:16. λίθον, ὸ̔ν ἀπεδοκίμασαν … οὗτος ἐγενήθη (Ps 117:22) Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; 1 Pt 2:7 v.l.—παντὶ ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ Lk 12:48. ὅρκον, ὸ̔ν ὤμοσεν (=μνησθῆναι ὅρκου ὅν) 1:73 (s. W-S. §24, 7 note). τοὺς λίθους, οὓς εἶδες, ἀποβεβλημένους, οὗτοι … ἐφόρεσαν Hs 9, 13, 3. Cp. 1J 2:25.
    ε. Attraction can, as in earlier Gk. (Thu. 2, 70, 4), fail to take place when the relative clause is more distinctly separated fr. its antecedent by additional modifiers of the noun and by the importance attaching to the content of the relative clause itself (B-D-F §294, 1; Rob. 714f): τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς, ἣν ἔπηξεν ὁ κύριος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος Hb 8:2. But s. also Mk 13:19; J 2:22; 4:5; Ac 8:32; 1 Ti 4:3; Tit 1:2; Phlm 10; Hb 9:7; Rv 1:20.
    ⓔ The noun which is the antecedent of a relative clause can be incorporated into the latter
    α. without abbreviating the constr. and without attraction of the case: ᾗ οὐ δοκεῖτε ὥρᾳ = τῇ ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ δοκ. Mt 24:44; cp. Lk 12:40; 17:29, 30. ἃ ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα 24:1. ὸ̔ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον J 6:14. ὸ̔ θέλω ἀγαθόν Ro 7:19.
    β. w. abbreviation, in that a prep. normally used twice is used only once: ἐν ᾧ κρίματι κρίνετε κριθήσεσθε = ἐν τῷ κρίματι, ἐν ᾧ κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε Mt 7:2a. Cp. vs. 2b; Mk 4:24. ἐν ᾧ ἦν τόπῳ = ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐν ᾧ ἦν J 11:6. καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον = κατὰ τὸν τρόπον, καθʼ ὅν Ac 15:11.
    γ. w. a change in case, due mostly to attraction
    א. of the relative pron. περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐποίησεν πονηρῶν = περὶ πάντων πονηρῶν, ἃ ἐπ. Lk 3:19. περὶ πασῶν ὧν εἶδον δυνάμεων = περὶ πασῶν δυνάμεων, ἃς εἶδον 19:37. αἰτίαν … ὧν ἐγὼ ὑπενόουν πονηρῶν Ac 25:18.—The dat. of the relative is also attracted to other cases: ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας = ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας, ᾖ Mt 24:38; Lk 1:20; 17:27; Ac 1:2. ἀφʼ ἧς ἡμέρας Col 1:6, 9.
    ב. of the noun to which the rel. refers: ὸ̔ν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα Ἰωάννην, οὗτος ἠγέρθη = Ἰωάννης ὸ̔ν κτλ. Mk 6:16 εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς = τῷ τύπῳ τῆς διδαχῆς εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε Ro 6:17.
    δ. The analysis is doubtful in passages like περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων = περὶ τῶν λόγων οὓς κατηχήθης or τῶν λόγων, περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης Lk 1:4. ἄγοντες παρʼ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνι Ac 21:16 must acc. to the sense = ἄγοντες πρὸς Μνάσωνα, ἵνα ξενισθῶμεν παρʼ αὐτῷ. S. B-D-F §294, 5; Rob. 719.
    ⓕ The prep. can be omitted before the relative pron. if it has already been used before the antecedent noun: ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ὧ.) Ac 1:21. εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὅ (=εἰς ὅ) 13:2. ἀπὸ πάντων ὧν (=ἀφʼ ὧν) vs. 38. Cp. 26:2. ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ᾧ) Rv 18:6.
    ⓖ The neut. is used
    α. in explanations, esp. of foreign words and of allegories: ὅ ἐστιν which or that is, which means: βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης Hb 7:2; cp. Mt 27:33; Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; 15:42. Also ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον Mt 1:23; Mk 5:41; Ac 4:36; cp. J 1:38, 41f. ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενος κρανίου τόπος Mk 15:22 v.l. (for μεθερμηνευόμενον). τόπος, ὸ̔ λέγεται, Ἑβραϊστὶ Γολγοθά J 19:17.—S. also αὐλῆς, ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον Mk 15:16. λεπτὰ δὺο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 12:42. τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἡ ἐκκλησία Col 1:24. πλεονέκτης ὅ ἐστιν εἰδωλολάτρης Eph 5:5. τὴν ἀγάπην ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος Col 3:14.—B-D-F §132, 2.
    β. when the relative pron. looks back upon a whole clause: τοῦτον τ. Ἰησοῦν ἀνέστησεν ὁ θεός, οὗ πάντες ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν μάρτυρες Ac 2:32; cp. 3:15; 11:30; 26:9f; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29; 1 Pt 2:8; Rv 21:8.
    γ. ὅ is to be understood as an obj. acc. and gains its content fr. what immediately follows in these places (s. W-S. §24, 9; Rob. 715): ὸ̔ ἀπέθανεν, τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν ἐφάπαξ = τὸν θάνατον, ὸ̔ν ἀπέθανεν κτλ. what he died, i.e. the death he suffered, he suffered for sin Ro 6:10a; cp. vs. 10b. ὸ̔ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί the life that I now live in the flesh Gal 2:20.
    ⓗ The relative is used w. consecutive or final mng. (result or purpose): τίς ἔγνω νοῦν κυρίου, ὸ̔ς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν; who has known the mind of the Lord, so that he could instruct him? 1 Cor 2:16 (cp. Is 40:13). ἄξιός ἐστιν ᾧ παρέξῃ τοῦτο he is worthy that you should grant him this Lk 7:4. ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου …, ὸ̔ς κατασκευάσει Mt 11:10. ἔπεμψα Τιμόθεον …, ὸ̔ς ὑμᾶς ἀναμνήσει 1 Cor 4:17. ἔχετε μεθʼ ἑαυτῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐργάσεσθε τὸ καλόν 21:2.
    ⓘ taking the place of the interrogative pron.
    α. in indirect questions (Soph., Oed. Rex 1068; Thu. 1, 136, 4; Attic ins of 411 B.C. in Meisterhans3-Schw.; pap [Witkowski 30, 7]; oft. Joseph. [Schmidt 369]; Just., D. 44, 4 διʼ ἧς ὁδοῦ). ὸ̔ ἐγὼ ποιῶ what I am doing J 13:7. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7 (Just., D. 9, 1 οὐ γὰρ οἶδας ὸ̔ λέγεις).—J 18:21.
    β. NT philology has generally dismissed the proposition that ὅς is used in direct questions (Mlt. 93; B-D-F §300, 2; Radermacher2 78; PMaas [see 1bβב above]). An unambiguous example of it is yet to be found. Even the ins on a goblet in Dssm., LO 100ff [LAE 125–31], ET 33, 1922, 491–93 leaves room for doubt. Therefore also the translation of ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 as ‘what are you here for?’ (so Goodsp., Probs. 41–43; similarly, as early as Luther, later Dssm.; JWilson, ET 41, 1930, 334) has been held suspect. S. ZNW 52, ’61, 109ff.—Rob. 725 doubts the interrogative here, but Mlt-Turner 50 inclines toward it. If further proof for interrogative use of ὅς can be found, lit.-crit. considerations (s. vv. 14–16) invite attention to the v.l. (s. Tdf. app.) ἐφʼ ᾦ, a combination used in commercial documents (PGrenf II, 17, 2; 5; Mayser II/1 p. 215); the colloquial use suggests the sense: What deal did you make?—See also 1bβב above.
    ⓙ combined w. particles
    α. with ἄν (ἐάν), s. ἄν I. b.
    β. with γέ (s. γέ aβ and cp. PFlor 370, 9) Ro 8:32.
    γ. w. δήποτε whatever J 5:3(4) v.l. (the vv.ll. vary betw. οἵῳ and ᾧ, δηποτοῦν and δήποτε).
    δ. w. καί who also Mk 3:19; Lk 6:13f; 7:49 al.
    ε. with περ = ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ (TestSol, TestAbr; TestJob 7:13; JosAs 14:12; GrBar; ApcSed 2:1; Jos., Ant. 2, 277, Vi. 95; apolog. [exc. Mel.]) just the one who Mk 15:6 v.l. ὅπερ which indeed Ox 840, 35; ISm 4:1. πάντα ἅπερ whatever GPt 11:45.
    ⓚ used w. preposition (s. also above: 1bα; 1bβב; 1eβ,γ; 1f, and s. Johannessohn, Präp. 382f [ind.]), whereby a kind of conjunction is formed:
    α. with ἀντί: ἀνθʼ ὧν (s. ἀντί 4) because Lk 1:20; 19:44; Ac 12:23; 2 Th 2:10; therefore Lk 12:3.
    β. w. εἰς: εἰς ὅ to this end 2 Th 1:11.
    γ. with ἐν: ἐν οἷς connects w. the situation described in what precedes under which circumstances = under these circumstances Lk 12:1; Ac 24:18 v.l.; 26:12. So also perh. ἐν ᾧ 1 Pt 1:6; 2:12; 3:16, 19; 4:4. S. also ἐν 7 and cp. 1bα above.
    δ. w. ἐπί: ἐφʼ ᾧ (normally, ‘for which’: Plut., Cimon 483 [8, 6] Cimon receives honors in requital for his generous deed [cp. the pl. ἐφʼ οἷς IPriene 114, 22 of honors heaped on a gymnasiarch for his numerous contributions]; cp. Plut., Mor. 522e and Diog. L. 7, 173. Conversely Plut., Aratus 1048 [44, 4]: A. suffers some dishonor ‘for what’ he did to one of his associates) has freq. been interpreted=ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that, because Ro 5:12 (lit. on ἁμαρτία 3a); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for 4:10. But a commercial metaphor may find expression in the first 3 passages cited here; s. ἐπί 6c. Difft. on Ro 5:12 JFitzmyer, NTS 39, ’93, 321–39; also comm. (Anchor), ad loc.: ‘with the result that, so that’
    ε. οὗ χάριν therefore Lk 7:47.
    ζ. in indications of time: ἀφʼ ἧς (s. ἀπό 2bγ and cp. BGU 252, 9 [98 A.D.]) from the time when; since Lk 7:45; Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4; Hs 8, 6, 6 v.l.; as soon as, after 8, 1, 4.—ἀφʼ οὗ (s. ἀπό 2bγ) when once, since Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18. ἄχρι οὗ (s. ἄχρι 1bα) until (the time when) Ac 7:18; Ro 11:25; 1 Cor 11:26; Gal 3:19. Also ἕως οὗ until Mt 1:25; 13:33; 14:22; 17:9; Lk 13:21; D 11:6 al. μέχρις οὗ until Mk 13:30; Gal 4:19.—On the gen. οὗ as an adv. of place s. it as a separate entry.
    ② Demonstrative pron. this (one) (Hom.+; prose of Hdt. et al. [Kühner-G. II 228f]; pap, LXX).
    ⓐ ὸ̔ς δέ but he (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatris 22; PRyl 144, 14 [38 A.D.]) Mk 15:23; J 5:11 v.l. Mostly
    ⓑ ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δέ the one … the other (Hippocr.+; very oft. in later wr.; POxy 1189, 7 [c. 117 A.D.]; SibOr 3, 654) the masc. in var. cases of sing. and pl. Mt 22:5; Lk 23:33; Ac 27:44; Ro 14:5; 1 Cor 11:21; 2 Cor 2:16; Jd 22f. ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δέ this … that Ro 9:21. ἃ μὲν … ἃ δέ (Lucian, Rhet. Praec. 15) some … others 2 Ti 2:20. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δὲ … ὸ̔ς δέ Mt 21:35; 25:15 (Lucian, Tim. 57 διδοὺς … ᾧ μὲν πέντε δραχμάς, ᾧ δέ μνᾶν, ᾧ δὲ ἡμιτάλαντον). ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δὲ … ὸ̔ δέ Mt 13:8b, 23. ᾧ μὲν … ἄλλῳ δὲ … ἑτέρῳ (ἄλλῳ δέ is then repeated five times, and before the last one there is a second ἑτέρῳ) 1 Cor 12:8–10. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἄλλο κτλ. Mk 4:4. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἕτερον (repeated several times) Lk 8:5. ἃ μὲν … ἄλλα δέ (repeated several times) Mt 13:4–8a. In anacoluthon οὓς μέν without οὓς δέ 1 Cor 12:28. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὁ δὲ ἀσθενῶν Ro 14:2.—B-D-F §250. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 100f.—DELG 1 ὅς. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὅς

  • 11 πείθω

    A persuade, [tense] impf.

    ἔπειθον Il.22.91

    , etc.; [dialect] Ep. and Lyr.

    πεῖθον 16.842

    , B.8.16 : [tense] fut.

    πείσω Il.9.345

    , etc.; [dialect] Ep. inf.

    πεισέμεν 5.252

     : [tense] aor. 1

    ἔπεισα Pi.O.2.80

    , A.Eu.84, Ar.Pl. 304, etc. (Hom. has only opt.

    πείσειε Od.14.123

    ); [dialect] Aeol. part.

    πείσαις Pi.O.3.16

     : [tense] aor. 2

    ἔπῐθον Id.P.3.65

     (poet. πίθον), Corinn.Supp.2.58 (poet. dual πιθέταν), A. Supp. 941, Ar.Pl. 949, Theoc.22.64, used by Hom. only in [dialect] Ep. redupl. forms

    πεπίθωμεν Il.9.112

    ,

    πεπίθοιμι 23.40

    , A.R.3.14,

    πεπῐθεῖν Il.9.184

    , A.R.3.536,

    πεπῐθών Pi.I.4(3).72

     (v. infr.),

    πεπιθοῦσα Il.15.26

     (ind. not in Il. or Od.,

    πέπιθον A.R.1.964

    ,

    πέπιθε h.Ap. 275

    ): [tense] pf.

    πέπεικα Lys. 26.7

    , Is.8.24, Isoc.14.15 :—[voice] Med. and [voice] Pass. [full] πείθομαι, obey, Il.1.79, etc.: [tense] fut. πείσομαι ib. 289, etc.: [tense] aor. 2 ἐπῐθόμην, [dialect] Ep.

    πιθόμην 5.201

    ,

    ἐπίθετο Ar.Nu.73

    ,

    ἐπίθοντο Il.3.260

    , IG22.29.14, redupl.

    πεπίθοντο Orph.Fr. 135

     ; imper.

    πίθεο Pi.P.1.59

    ,

    πιθοῦ S.Ant. 992

    , pl.

    πίθεσθε A.Eu. 794

     ; subj.

    πίθωμαι Il.18.273

    , etc.; opt.

    πιθοίμην 4.93

    , etc. (redupl.

    πεπίθοιτο 10.204

    ); inf.

    πιθέσθαι 7.293

    , etc. (

    πεπιθέσθαι AP14.75

    ); part.

    πιθόμενος S.Ph. 1226

     : [tense] aor. 1 [voice] Med.

    ἐπεισάμην IG12(5).720.5

     (Andros, ii B. C.), Aristid.1.391 J., Sopat. in Rh.8.150 W.: [tense] fut. [voice] Pass.

    πεισθήσομαι S.Ph. 624

    , Pl.Sph. 248e, etc.: [tense] aor. 1

    ἐπείσθην A.Eu. 593

    , S.OT 526, Ar.Nu. 866, X.An.7.7.29 : [tense] pf.

    πέπεισμαι A.Pers. 697

    , E.El. 578, Pl.Prt. 328e; Thess. [tense] pf. inf.

    πεπεῖστειν IG9(2).517.16

     (Larissa, iii B. C.).
    II intr. tenses of [voice] Act., in pass. sense, [tense] pf. 2

    πέποιθα Il.4.325

    , etc. (not freq. in Prose); imper.

    πέπεισθι A.Eu. 599

     codd.; [ per.] 2sg. subj.

    πεποίθῃς Il.1.524

     ; [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 1pl. πεποίθομεν (for- ωμεν) Od.10.335 ; opt.

    πεποιθοίη Ar.Ach. 940

     : [tense] plpf.

    ἐπεποίθειν Il. 16.171

     ; [ per.] 3pl.

    ἐπεποίθεσαν Hdt.9.88

     ; [dialect] Ep.

    πεποίθεα Od.4.434

    , 8.181 ; [ per.] 1pl.

    ἐπέπιθμεν Il.2.341

    , 4.159 : Pi. uses [tense] aor. 2 part. πιθών = πιθόμενος, P.3.28, redupl.

    πεπιθών I.4(3).72

    .
    III as if from [full] πῐθέω, Hom. has [tense] fut.

    πῐθήσω Od.21.369

     ( obey): [tense] aor. part.

    πῐθήσας Il.4.398

     ( trust), cf. Hes. Op. 359, 671, Pi.P.4.109, A.Ch. 618 (lyr.), Lyc.735 ; redupl. [tense] aor. subj. πεπῐθήσω trans., Il.22.223 :—also [dialect] Aeol. [full] πίθημι, part.

    πίθεις Alc.Supp. 9.4

    .
    A [voice] Act., prevail upon, persuade, usu. by fair means, τινα Il.9.345, etc.; πεπιθεῖν φρένας Αἰακίδαο ib. 184 ;

    σοὶ δὲ φρένας ἄφρονι πεῖθε 16.842

     ;

    τοῦ θυμὸν ἐνὶ στήθεσσιν ἔπειθον 9.587

    , cf. Od.7.258, 23.337 ;

    Ἕκτορι θυμὸν ἔπειθε Il.22.78

     : c. acc. pers. et inf., persuade one to.., ib. 223, A.Eu. 724, etc.; π. τινὰς ὥστε δοῦναι, etc., Hdt.6.5, cf. Th.3.31, etc.; ὥστε μὴ .. S.Ph. 901 ; later ἵνα .. Ev.Matt. 27.20, Plu.2.181a; π. τινὰς ὡς χρὴ.., ὡς ἔστι .., Pl.R. 327c, 364b;

    π. τινὰ ἐς τὴν ὁμολογίαν Th.5.76

     ;

    κοὐδείς γέ μ' ἂν πείσειεν.. τὸ μὴ ἐλθεῖν Ar.Ra.68

     ; πείθω ἐμαυτόν I persuade myself, am persuaded, believe, Th.6.33, And.1.70, Pl.Grg. 453b, etc.; also

    π. τι ὠφέλιμον ὄν Th.4.17

     : freq. in part., πείσας by persuasion, by fair means, opp. ἐν δόλῳ, S.Ph. 102, cf. 612; opp. βίᾳ, Trag.Adesp.402 ; πόλιν πείσας having obtained the city's consent, S. OC 1298 ;

    δᾶμον πείσαις λόγῳ Pi.O.3.16

     ; μὴ πείσας unless by leave, Pl.Lg. 844e ;

    οὐ πείσαντες τὸν δῆμον Aeschin.3.41

     ; πείθοντες, opp. βίᾳ, X.An.5.5.11 ; π. γυναῖκα, opp. βιάζεσθαι, Id.Cyr.6.1.34 ; πέπεικε, opp. ἠνάγκακε, Pl.Hipparch. 232b (but

    π. ἀνάγκῃ D.C.62.16

    , cf. πειθανάγκη): with neut. pron., persuade one to or of a thing,

    τοῦτό γε οὐκ ἔπειθε τοὺς Φωκαιέας Hdt.1.163

    , cf. A.Pr. 1064 (anap.), Pl.R. 399b, etc.;

    ἔπειθον οὐδέν' οὐδέν A.Ag. 1212

     ; μὴ πεῖθ' ἃ μὴ δεῖ do not attempt to persuade me to.., S.OC 1442 ; also τοιάνδ' ἔπειθε ῥῆσιν addressed them thus, A.Supp. 615.
    2 prevail on by entreaty, Il. 24.219, Od.14.363 ;

    τότε κέν μιν ἱλασσάμενοι πεπίθοιμεν Il.1.100

     ;

    ὥς κέν μιν ἀρεσσάμενοι πεπίθωμεν 9.112

    , cf. 181, 386, Hes.Sc. 450 ;

    Ζηνὸς ἦτορ λιταῖς Pi.O.2.80

    , cf. Pl.R. 366a, Ap. 37d : c. dupl. acc.,

    τὸν φόρον ὑποτελῶ Ἀθηναίοισιν, ὃν ἂν πείθω Ἀθηναίους IG12.39.27

    .
    2 π. τινὰ χρήμασι bribe, Hdt.8.134, Lys.21.10 ; π. ἐπὶ μισθῷ μισθῷ, Hdt.8.4, 9.33, Th.2.96, etc. ([voice] Pass.,

    χρήμασι πεισθείς Id.1.137

    ): prov.,

    δῶρα θεοὺς πείθει Hes.Fr. 272

     ; πείθειν τινά alone, Lys. 7.21, X.An.1.3.19, Act.Ap. 12.20.
    3 offood, tempt, Xenocr. ap. Orib. 2.58.84.
    B [voice] Pass. and [voice] Med., to be prevailed on, won over, persuaded, abs., Il.5.201, etc. ; imper. freq. in Trag., πείθου be persuaded, S.OC 520, El. 1015, E.Fr. 440 ; but πιθοῦ comply, S.OC 1181, El. 1207 : c. inf., to be persuaded to do, Id.Ph. 624; πείθεσθέ μοι πρύτανιν ἑλέσθαι Pl.Prt. 338a ; also πείθεσθαί τινι ὥστε .. Th. 2.2 ; ὃ.. ὑμεῖς.. ἥκιστ' ἂν ὀξέως πείθοισθε (sc. πρᾶξαι) Id.6.34 ; ἑκὼν καὶ πεπεισμένος of one's own free will, POxy. ivp 203 (iv A.D.), etc. ; τὰ μὲν παρ' ἡμῶν ἴσθι σοι πεπεισμένα we are won over to you, Ar. Th. 1170.
    2 πείθεσθαί τινι listen to one, obey him, Il. 1.79, etc. ; τοῖς ἐν τέλει βεβῶσι π. S. Ant. 67 ; τοῖς ἄρχουσι, τῷ νόμῳ, X. Cyr. 1.2.8, An. 7.3.39 ;

    μᾶλλον τῷ θεῷ ἢ ὑμῖν Pl. Ap. 29d

     : sts. c. dupl. dat., ἔπεσι, μύθοισι π. τινί, Il.1.150, 23.157 : without dat. pers.,

    ἐπείθετο μύθῳ 1.33

    , cf. Od. 17.177 ; γήραϊ πείθεσθαι yield, succumb to old age, Il.23.645 ; στυγερῇ πειθώμεθα δαιτί let us comply with the custom of eating, sad though the meal be, ib.48 ; νῦν μὲν πειθώμεθα νυκτὶ μελαίνῃ, of leaving off the labours of the day, 8.502 ; ἀδίκοις ἔργμασι π. Sol.4.11, 13.12.
    b with Adj. neut., σημάντορι πάντα πιθέσθαι obey him in all things, Od. 17.21 ; ἅ τιν' οὐ πείσεσθαι ὀΐω wherein I think some will not obey, Il.1.289, cf. 4.93, 7.48, Hdt. 6.100, etc. ;

    πάντ' ἔγωγε πείσομαι S.Aj. 529

     ;

    πείσομαι δ' ἃ σοὶ δοκεῖ Id.Tr. 1180

     ;

    οὐ.. πείθομαι τὸ δρᾶν Id.Ph. 1252

     ;

    μύθοις.. πεισθεὶς ἀφανῆ E. Hipp. 1288

     (anap.), cf. Lys.22.3 : rarely with Noun in acc., χρήμασι πεισθῆναι [ τὴν ἀναχώρησιν] Th.2.21 (s.v.l.).
    3 c. gen., four times in Hdt.,

    πείθεσθαί τινος 1.126

    , 5.29, 33,6.12, cf. E. IA 726, Th. 7.73 ;

    πείσθητί μευ Herod. 1.66

     ; κείνου.. πιθοίατο vulg. in Il.10.57.
    II πείθεσθαί τινι believe, trust in,

    πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ Od. 20.45

     ;

    οἰωνοῖσι Il.12.238

    ;

    τεράεσσι θεῶν καὶ Ζηνὸς ἀρωγῇ 4.408

     ;

    ἐνυπνίῳ Pi.O. 13.79

     ;

    λεγομένοισι Hdt. 2.146

    , etc.: c. acc. et inf., believe that..,

    οὐ γάρ πω ἐπείθετο ὃν πατέρ' εἶναι Od. 16.192

    , cf. Hdt. 1.8, etc.: c. dat. pers. et inf., π. τινὶ μὴ εἶναι χρήματα, = ὅτι χρήματα οὐκ ἔχει, X.An. 7.8.3 : with

    ὡς, οὐ πείσονται ὡς σὺ αὐτὸς οὐκ ἠθέλησας Pl. Cri. 44c

    , cf. R. 391b : with neut. Adj. or Pron., τὰ περὶ Αἴγυπτον τοῖσι λέγουσι αὐτὰ π., οὐκ ἐπείθοντο τὰ ἐσαγγελθέντα, Hdt.2.12, 8.81 ;

    πείθεσθε τούτῳ ταῦτα Ar. Th. 592

     ; ταῦτ' ἐγώ σοι οὐ πείθομαι I do not take this on your word, Pl.Ap. 25e, cf. Phdr. 235b : abs.,

    ὡς ἐγὼ πείθομαι Phld.Po.5.34

    .
    b π. τινὰ ὅπως .. to believe of him, that.., E. Hipp. 1251.
    III [tense] pf. 2 πέποιθα trust, rely on, c. dat. pers. vel rei, Il.4.325, etc. (not freq. in early Prose, as

    αὑτῷ πεποιθέναι Pl. Mx. 248a

    ): c. dat. et inf.,

    οὔ πω χερσὶ πέποιθα ἄνδρ' ἀπαμύνασθαι Od. 16.71

    , cf. Il.13.96, etc.: c. dat.,

    οἷσι.. μαρναμένοισι πέποιθε Od.16.98

     : later c. inf. only, πέποιθα τοῦτ' ἐπισπάσειν κλέος I trust to win this fame, S.Aj. 769 ; αἰχμήν.. μᾶλλον θεοῦ σέβειν πεποιθώς daring to.., A. Th. 530: once in Hdt.,

    χρήμασι ἐπεποίθεσαν διώσεσθαι 9.88

     : rarely c. acc. et inf.,

    πέποιθα.. τὸν πυρφόρον ἥξειν κεραυνόν A. Th. 444

     ;

    εἴ τις πέποιθεν ἑαυτῷ Χριστοῦ εἶναι 2 Ep.Cor.10.7

     ; π. εἴς τινας ὅτι .. Ep.Gal.5.10; ἐπί τινας ὅτι .. 2 Ep.Cor. 2.3 ;

    ἐπὶ χρήμασι Ev.Marc. 10.24

    : abs., ὄφρα πεποίθῃς that you may feel confidence, Il.1.524, Od.13.344 ; πεποιθώς in sure confidence, LXXDe. 33.28.
    IV post-Hom. [tense] pf. [voice] Pass. πέπεισμαι believe, trust, c. dat.,

    νεκροῖσι A. Eu. 599

     ;

    ὀνείροις E.Hel. 1190

    , etc.: c. acc. et inf., συνοίσειν ταῦτα πέπ. D.4.51, cf. Pl. R. 368a : abs.,

    νῦν δὲ πέπεισμαι Id.Prt. 328e

     ; πεπεισμένος ἔκ τινων λογίων persuaded by.., Plu.Rom. 14 ;

    πεπείσμεθα περὶ ὑμῶν τὰ κρείττονα Ep.Hebr.6.9

    . (Cf. Lat. fido, fides.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πείθω

  • 12 κόσμος

    κόσμος, ου, ὁ (Hom.+)
    ① that which serves to beautify through decoration, adornment, adorning (Hom.+; Diod S 20, 4, 5 τῶν γυναικῶν τὸν κόσμον; OGI 531, 13; SIG 850, 10; IMaronIsis 41; PEleph 1, 4; PSI 240, 12 γυναικεῖον κόσμον; LXX; TestJud 12:1; JosAs 2:6 al.; Philo, Migr. Abr. 97 γυναικῶν κ.; Jos., Ant. 1, 250; 15, 5; Just., A II, 11, 4f) of women’s attire, etc. ὁ ἔξωθεν … κόσμος external adorning 1 Pt 3:3 (Vi. Hom. 4 of the inward adornment of a woman, beside σωφροσύνη; Crates, Ep. 9; Pythag., Ep. 11, 1; Plut., Mor. 141e; on the topic of external adornment cp. SIG 736, 15–26).
    ② condition of orderliness, orderly arrangement, order (Hom. et al.; s. HDiller, Die vorphilosophische Gebrauch von κ. und κοσμεῖν: BSnell Festschr., ’56, 47–60) μετὰ κόσμου in order Dg 12:9 (text uncertain; s. μετακόσμιος).
    ③ the sum total of everything here and now, the world, the (orderly) universe, in philosophical usage (so, acc. to Plut., Mor. 886b, as early as Pythagoras; certainly Heraclitus, Fgm. 66; Pla., Gorg. 508a, Phdr. 246c; Chrysipp., Fgm. 527 v. Arnim κόσμος σύστημα ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς καὶ τῶν ἐν τούτοις περιεχομένων φύσεων. Likew. Posidonius in Diog. L. 7, 138; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 2 p. 391b, 9ff; 2 and 4 Macc; Wsd; EpArist 254; Philo, Aet. M. 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 21; Test12Patr; SibOr 7, 123; AssMos Fgm. b Denis [=Tromp p. 272]; Just., A I, 20, 2 al.; Ath. 19, 2 al.; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 68, 14; Did., Gen. 36, 7; 137, 13.—The other philosoph. usage, in which κ. denotes the heaven in contrast to the earth, is prob. without mng. for our lit. [unless perh. Phil 2:15 κ.=‘sky’?]). ἡ ἀέναος τοῦ κ. σύστασις the everlasting constitution of the universe 1 Cl 60:1 (cp. OGI 56, 48 εἰς τὸν ἀέναον κ.). Sustained by four elements Hv 3, 13, 3. πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κ. εἶναι before the world existed J 17:5. ἀπὸ καταβολῆς [κόσμου] from the beginning of the world Mt 13:35; 25:34; Lk 11:50; Hb 4:3; 9:26; Rv 13:8; 17:8. Also ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς κ. Mt 24:21 or ἀπὸ κτίσεως κ. Ro 1:20.—B 5:5 ἀπὸ καταβ. κ. evidently means at the foundation of the world (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.). πρὸ καταβολῆς κ. before the foundation of the world J 17:24; Eph 1:4; 1 Pt 1:20 (on the uses w. καταβολή s. that word, 1). οὐδὲν εἴδωλον ἐν κ. no idol has any real existence in the universe (Twentieth Century NT) 1 Cor 8:4. Of the creation in its entirety 3:22. ὁ κόσμος ὅλος = πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις (Sallust. 21 p. 36, 13; TestSol 5:7; TestJob 33:4) Hs 9, 2, 1; 9, 14, 5. φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ stars in the universe Phil 2:15 (s. above). Esp. of the universe as created by God (Epict 4, 7, 6 ὁ θεὸς πάντα πεποίηκεν, τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον; Wsd 9:9; 2 Macc 7:23 ὁ τοῦ κ. κτίστης; 4 Macc 5:25; Just., A I, 59, 1 al.; Ath. 8, 2 al.) ὁ ποιήσας τὸν κ. who has made the world Ac 17:24. ὁ κτίστης τοῦ σύμπαντος κ. 1 Cl 19:2; ὁ κτίσας τὸν κ. Hv 1, 3, 4; cp. m 12, 4, 2. ὁ τοῦ παντὸς κ. κυριεύων B 21:5. οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15. Christ is called παντὸς τοῦ κ. κύριος 5:5; and the κ. owes its origin to his agency J 1:10b. The world was created for the sake of the church Hv 2, 4, 1.—The universe, as the greatest space conceivable, is not able to contain someth. (Philo, Ebr. 32) J 21:25.
    ④ the sum total of all beings above the level of the animals, the world, as θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν (i.e. οἱ ἀπόστολοι) τῷ κόσμῳ καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 Cor 4:9. Here the world is divided into angels and humans (cp. the Stoic definition of the κόσμος in Stob., Ecl. I p. 184, 8 τὸ ἐκ θεῶν καὶ ἀνθρώπων σύστημα; likew. Epict 1, 9, 4.—Acc. to Ocellus Luc. 37, end, the κ. consists of the sphere of the divine beyond the moon and the sphere of the earthly on this side of the moon).
    ⑤ planet earth as a place of inhabitation, the world (SIG 814, 31 [67 A.D.] Nero, ὁ τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου κύριος; the meaning of the birthday of Augustus for the world OGI 458, 40 [=IPriene 105]; 2 Macc 3:12; Jos., Ant. 9, 241; 10, 205; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 68)
    ⓐ gener. Mk 16:15. τὰς βασιλείας τοῦ κ. Mt 4:8; ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κ. 26:13. Cp. 13:38 (cp. Hs 5, 5, 2); Mk 14:9; Hs 9, 25, 2. τὸ φῶς τοῦ κ. τούτου the light of this world (the sun) J 11:9. In rhetorical exaggeration ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τ. κόσμῳ Ro 1:8 (cp. the Egypt. grave ins APF 5, 1913, 169 no. 24, 8 ὧν ἡ σωφροσύνη κατὰ τὸν κ. λελάληται). Abraham as κληρονόμος κόσμου heir of the world 4:13.—Cp. 1 Cor 14:10; Col 1:6. ἡ ἐν τῷ κ. ἀδελφότης the brotherhood in the (whole) world 1 Pt 5:9. ἐγένετο ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ κ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν our Lord has assumed the sovereignty of the world Rv 11:15. τὰ ἔθνη τοῦ κ. (not LXX, but prob. rabbinic אֻמּוֹת הָעוֹלָם=humankind apart fr. Israel; Billerb. II 191; Dalman, Worte 144f) the unconverted in the world Lk 12:30. In this line of development, κόσμος alone serves to designate the polytheistic unconverted world Ro 11:12, 15.—Other worlds (lands) beyond the ocean 1 Cl 20:8.—Many of these pass. bear the connotation of
    ⓑ the world as the habitation of humanity (as SibOr 1, 160). So also Hs 9, 17, 1f. εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν κ. of entrance into the world by being born 1 Cl 38:3. ἐκ τοῦ κ. ἐξελθεῖν leave this present world (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 5 ἔξω τ. κόσμου φεύγειν; s. ἐξέρχομαι 5; cp. Hippol., Ref. 5, 16, 7) 1 Cor 5:10b; 2 Cl 8:3. γεννηθῆναι εἰς τὸν κ. be born into the world J 16:21. ἕως ἐσμὲν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ κ. 2 Cl 8:2. οὐδὲν εἰσφέρειν εἰς τὸν κ. (Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 294 τὸν μηδὲν εἰς τὸν κόσμον εἰσενηνοχότα) 1 Ti 6:7 (Pol 4:1). πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθον εἰς τὸν κ. 2J 7.—ἐν τῷ κόσμω τούτῳ J 12:25 (κ. need not here be understood as an entity hostile to God, but the transition to the nuance in 7b, below, is signalled by the term that follows: ζωὴν αἰώνιον). ἵνα εἰς κόσμον προέλθῃ AcPlCor 2:6.
    ⓒ earth, world in contrast to heaven (Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 59; Iren., 1, 4, 2 [Harv. I 35, 5]; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 15, 24) ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ 2 Cl 19:3.—Esp. when mention is made of the preexistent Christ, who came fr. another world into the κόσμος. So, above all, in John (Bultmann, index I κόσμος) ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὸν κ. (τοῦτον) J 6:14; 9:39; 11:27; 16:28a; 18:37; specif. also come into the world as light 12:46; cp. 1:9; 3:19. Sending of Jesus into the world 3:17a; 10:36; 17:18; 1J 4:9. His εἶναι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ J 1:10a; 9:5a; 17:12 v.l. Leaving the world and returning to the Father 13:1a; 16:28b. Cp. 14:19; 17:11a. His kingship is not ἐκ τοῦ κ. τούτου of this world i.e. not derived from the world or conditioned by its terms and evaluations 18:36ab.—Also Χρ. Ἰησοῦς ἦλθεν εἰς τ. κόσμον 1 Ti 1:15; cp. ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ (opp. ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ) 3:16.—εἰσερχόμενος εἰς τὸν κ. Hb 10:5.
    ⓓ the world outside in contrast to one’s home PtK 3 p. 15, 13; 19.
    ⑥ humanity in general, the world (TestAbr B 8 p. 113, 11 [Stone p. 74]; ApcEsdr 3:6 p. 27, 14; SibOr 1, 189; Just., A I, 39, 3 al.)
    ⓐ gener. οὐαὶ τῷ κ. ἀπὸ τῶν σκανδάλων woe to humankind because of the things that cause people to sin Mt 18:7; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κ. the light for humanity 5:14; cp. J 8:12; 9:5. ὁ σωτὴρ τοῦ κ. 4:42; 1J 4:14 (this designation is found in inscriptions, esp. oft. of Hadrian [WWeber, Untersuchungen z. Geschichte des Kaisers Hadrianus 1907, 225; 226; 229]).—J 1:29; 3:17b; 17:6.—κρίνειν τὸν κ. (SibOr 4, 184; TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 11 [Stone p. 32]; ApcMos 37) of God, Christ J 12:47a; Ro 3:6; B 4:12; cp. Ro 3:19. Of believers 1 Cor 6:2ab (cp. Sallust. 21 p. 36, 13 the souls of the virtuous, together w. the gods, will rule the whole κόσμος). Of Noah διʼ ἧς (sc. πίστεως) κατέκρινεν τὸν κ. Hb 11:7. ἡ ἁμαρτία εἰς τὸν κ. εἰσῆλθεν Ro 5:12; likew. θάνατος εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν κ. 1 Cl 3:4 (Wsd 2:24; 14:14). Cp. Ro 5:13; 1 Cor 1:27f. περικαθάρματα τοῦ κ. the refuse of humanity 4:13. Of persons before conversion ἄθεοι ἐν τῷ κ. Eph 2:12.—2 Cor 1:12; 5:19; Js 2:5; 1J 2:2; 4:1, 3. ἀρχαῖος κόσμος the people of the ancient world 2 Pt 2:5a; cp. vs. 5b; 3:6. Of pers. of exceptional merit: ὧν οὐκ ἦν ἄξιος ὁ κ. of whom the world was not worthy Hb 11:38.—ὅλος ὁ κ. all the world, everybody Ac 2:47 D; 1 Cl 5:7; cp. ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κ. 59:2; εἰς ὅλον τὸν κ. Hs 8, 3, 2. Likew. ὁ κόσμος (cp. Philo, De Prov. in Eus., PE 8, 14, 58) ὁ κ. ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλθεν J 12:19. ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κ. 8:26; ἐν τῷ κ. 17:13; ἐγὼ παρρησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κ. 18:20; cp. 7:4; 14:22. ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κ. 14:31; cp. 17:23; ἵνα ὁ κ. πιστεύῃ 17:21.
    ⓑ of all humanity, but especially of believers, as the object of God’s love J 3:16, 17c; 6:33, 51; 12:47b.
    ⑦ the system of human existence in its many aspects, the world
    ⓐ as scene of earthly joys, possessions, cares, sufferings (cp. 4 Macc 8:23) τὸν κ. ὅλον κερδῆσαι gain the whole world Mt 16:26; Mk 8:36; Lk 9:25; 2 Cl 6:2 (cp. Procop. Soph., Ep. 137 the whole οἰκουμένη is an unimportant possession compared to ἀρετή). τὰ τερπνὰ τοῦ κ. the delightful things in the world IRo 6:1. οἱ χρώμενοι τὸν κ. ὡς μὴ καταχρώμενοι those who use the world as though they had no use of it or those who deal with the world as having made no deals with it 1 Cor 7:31a. ἔχειν τὸν βίον τοῦ κ. possess worldly goods 1J 3:17. τὰ τοῦ κόσμου the affairs of the world 1 Cor 7:33f; cp. 1J 2:15f. The latter pass. forms an easy transition to the large number of exprs. (esp. in Paul and John) in which
    ⓑ the world, and everything that belongs to it, appears as that which is hostile to God, i.e. lost in sin, wholly at odds w. anything divine, ruined and depraved (Herm. Wr. 6, 4 [the κόσμος is τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς κακίας]; 13, 1 [ἡ τοῦ κ. ἀπάτη], in Stob. p. 428, 24 Sc.; En 48:7; TestIss 4:6; AscIs 3:25; Hdb., exc. on J 1:10; Bultmann ad loc.—cp. Sotades Maronita [III B.C.] 11 Diehl: the κόσμος is unjust and hostile to great men) IMg 5:2; IRo 2:2. ὁ κόσμος οὗτος this world (in contrast to the heavenly realm) J 8:23; 12:25, 31a; 13:1; 16:11; 18:36; 1J 4:17; 1 Cor 3:19; 5:10a; 7:31b; Hv 4, 3, 2ff; D 10:6; 2 Cl 5:1, 5; (opp. ὁ ἅγιος αἰών) B 10:11. ‘This world’ is ruled by the ἄρχων τοῦ κ. τούτου the prince of this world, the devil J 12:31b; 16:11; without τούτου 14:30. Cp. ὁ κ. ὅλος ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖται the whole world lies in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19; cp. 4:4; also ὁ αἰὼν τοῦ κ. τούτου Eph 2:2 (s. αἰών 4).—Christians must have nothing to do with this world of sin and separation fr. God: instead of desiring it IRo 7:1, one is to ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κ. keep oneself untainted by the world Js 1:27. ἀποφεύγειν τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κ. 2 Pt 2:20; cp. 1:4 (s. ἀποφεύγω 1).—Pol 5:3. ἡ φιλία τοῦ κ. ἔχθρα τ. θεοῦ ἐστιν Js 4:4a; cp. vs. 4b. When such an attitude is taken Christians are naturally hated by the world IRo 3:3; J 15:18, 19ad; 17:14a; 1J 3:13, as their Lord was hated J 7:7; 15:18; cp. 1:10c; 14:17; 16:20.—Also in Paul: God and world in opposition τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κ. and τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ θεοῦ the spirit of the world and the spirit that comes fr. God 1 Cor 2:12; σοφία τοῦ κ. and σοφία τοῦ θεοῦ 1:20f. ἡ κατὰ θεὸν λύπη and ἡ τοῦ κ. λύπη godly grief and worldly grief 2 Cor 7:10. The world is condemned by God 1 Cor 11:32; yet also the object of the divine plan of salvation 2 Cor 5:19; cp. 1 Cl 7:4; 9:4. A Christian is dead as far as this world is concerned: διʼ οὗ (i.e. Ἰ. Χρ.) ἐμοὶ κ. ἐσταύρωται κἀγὼ κόσμῳ through Christ the world has been crucified for me, and I have been (crucified) to the world Gal 6:14; cp. the question τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κ. δογματίζεσθε; Col 2:20b. For στοιχεῖα τοῦ κ. Gal 4:3; Col 2:8, 20a s. στοιχεῖον.—The use of κ. in this sense is even further developed in John. The κ. stands in opposition to God 1J 2:15f and hence is incapable of knowing God J 17:25; cp. 1J 4:5, and excluded fr. Christ’s intercession J 17:9; its views refuted by the Paraclete 16:8. Neither Christ himself 17:14c, 16b; 14:27, nor his own 15:19b; 17:14b, 16a; 1J 3:1 belong in any way to the ‘world’. Rather Christ has chosen them ‘out of the world’ J 15:19c, even though for the present they must still live ‘in the world’ 17:11b; cp. 13:1b; 17:15, 18b. All the trouble that they must undergo because of this, 16:33a, means nothing compared w. the victorious conviction that Christ (and the believers w. him) has overcome ‘the world’ vs. 33b; 1J 5:4f, and that it is doomed to pass away 2:17 (TestJob 33:4; Kephal. I 154, 21: the κόσμος τῆς σαρκός will pass away).
    ⑧ collective aspect of an entity, totality, sum total (SIG 850, 10 τὸν κόσμον τῶν ἔργων (but s. 1 above); Pr 17:6a) ὁ κ. τῆς ἀδικίας ἡ γλῶσσα καθίσταται the tongue becomes (or proves to be) the sum total of iniquity Js 3:6 (so, approx., Meinertz; FHauck.—MDibelius, Windisch and ASchlatter find mng. 7b here, whereas ACarr, Exp. 7th ser., 8, 1909, 318ff thinks of mng. 1). Χρ. τὸν ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου τῶν σῳζομένων σωτηρίας παθόντα Christ, who suffered or died (s. πάσχω 3aα) for the salvation of the sum total of those who are saved MPol 17:2.—FBytomski, D. genet. Entwicklung des Begriffes κόσμος in d. Hl. Schrift: Jahrb. für Philos. und spekul. Theol. 25, 1911, 180–201; 389–413 (only the OT); CSchneider, Pls u. d. Welt: Αγγελος IV ’32, 11–47; EvSchrenck, Der Kosmos-Begriff bei Joh.: Mitteilungen u. Nachrichten f. d. evang. Kirche in Russland 51, 1895, 1–29; RLöwe, Kosmos u. Aion ’35; RBultmann, D. Verständnis v. Welt u. Mensch im NT u. im Griechentum: ThBl 19, ’40, 1–14; GBornkamm, Christus u. die Welt in der urchr. Botschaft: ZTK 47, ’50, 212–26; ALesky, Kosmos ’63; RVölkl, Christ u. Welt nach dem NT ’61; GJohnston, οἰκουμένη and κ. in the NT: NTS 10, ’64, 352–60; NCassem, ibid. 19, ’72/73, 81–91; RBratcher, BT 31, ’80, 430–34.—B. 13; 440. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κόσμος

  • 13 στρώννυμι

    στρωννύω/στρώννυμι impf. ἐστρώννυον; fut. στρώσω (JosAs 13:12 cod. A [p. 58, 10 Bat.]), 3 pl.-σουσιν LXX; 1 aor. ἔστρωσα; pf. ἔστρωκα Pr 7:16. Pass.: pf. 3 sg. ἔστρωται Job 17:13; ptc. ἐστρωμένος (on the two forms of the word: B-D-F §92; Rob. 318.—For the word: Hom. [στορέννυμι, στόρνυμι], Aeschyl., X., Pla.; ins, pap, LXX, TestAbr; JosAs 2:15 [also cod. A 13:12]; Joseph.; SibOr 5, 438)
    ① to distribute someth. over a surface, spread τὶ someth. ἱμάτια κτλ. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ Mt 21:8ab; also εἰς τὴν ὁδόν Mk 11:8 (for the idea cp. 4 Km 9:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 111 ὑπεστρώννυεν αὐτῷ τὸ ἱμάτιον). χιτῶνας χαμαί Hs 9, 11, 7. στρῶσον σεαυτῷ (i.e. τὴν κλίνην; στρ. is used w. this acc. in Eur., Pla., and Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 44, 2 Jac.; Diod S 8, 32, 2; SIG 687, 16; 1022,1f τὴν κλίνην στρῶσαι τῷ Πλούτωνι. Cp. Ezk 23:41; TestAbr B 5 p. 109, 17f [Stone p. 66], cp. A 4 p. 80, 17 [Stone p. 8] δύο κλινάρια; Jos., Ant. 7, 231 κλίνας ἐστρωμένας) make your own bed Ac 9:34.—Of a room, without an indication of what is being spread or put on over a surface within it: ἀνάγαιον ἐστρωμένον Mk 14:15; Lk 22:12 may be a paved upper room (στρ. has this mng. in an ins APF 2, 1903, 570 no. 150. So Luther et al.—Jos., Ant. 8, 134 ἐστρωμένος means ‘floored’ or ‘panelled’). Others prefer 2a next
    ② to equip someth. with appropriate furnishing(s)
    ⓐ to furnish ἀνάγαιον ἐστρωμένον upper room furnished w. carpets or couches for the guests to recline on as they ate (EKlostermann, ELohmeyer; Field, Notes 39; somewhat as Plut., Artox. 10 [22, 10]; Artem. 2, 57 codd. Also Diod S 21, 12, 4; IG II, 622 ἔστρωσεν refers to a couch at a meal; Dalman, Arbeit VII 185. Eng. transl. gener. prefer this sense.—PGM 1, 107 χώρημα στρῶσαι means to prepare a room for a banquet) Mk 14:15; Lk 22:12.
    ⓑ to saddle a riding animal (L-S-J-M στόρνυμι II) ἔστρωσεν τὸν ὄνον Joseph saddled his donkey.—B. 573. DELG s.v. στόρνυμι.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > στρώννυμι

  • 14 στρωννύω

    στρωννύω/στρώννυμι impf. ἐστρώννυον; fut. στρώσω (JosAs 13:12 cod. A [p. 58, 10 Bat.]), 3 pl.-σουσιν LXX; 1 aor. ἔστρωσα; pf. ἔστρωκα Pr 7:16. Pass.: pf. 3 sg. ἔστρωται Job 17:13; ptc. ἐστρωμένος (on the two forms of the word: B-D-F §92; Rob. 318.—For the word: Hom. [στορέννυμι, στόρνυμι], Aeschyl., X., Pla.; ins, pap, LXX, TestAbr; JosAs 2:15 [also cod. A 13:12]; Joseph.; SibOr 5, 438)
    ① to distribute someth. over a surface, spread τὶ someth. ἱμάτια κτλ. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ Mt 21:8ab; also εἰς τὴν ὁδόν Mk 11:8 (for the idea cp. 4 Km 9:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 111 ὑπεστρώννυεν αὐτῷ τὸ ἱμάτιον). χιτῶνας χαμαί Hs 9, 11, 7. στρῶσον σεαυτῷ (i.e. τὴν κλίνην; στρ. is used w. this acc. in Eur., Pla., and Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 44, 2 Jac.; Diod S 8, 32, 2; SIG 687, 16; 1022,1f τὴν κλίνην στρῶσαι τῷ Πλούτωνι. Cp. Ezk 23:41; TestAbr B 5 p. 109, 17f [Stone p. 66], cp. A 4 p. 80, 17 [Stone p. 8] δύο κλινάρια; Jos., Ant. 7, 231 κλίνας ἐστρωμένας) make your own bed Ac 9:34.—Of a room, without an indication of what is being spread or put on over a surface within it: ἀνάγαιον ἐστρωμένον Mk 14:15; Lk 22:12 may be a paved upper room (στρ. has this mng. in an ins APF 2, 1903, 570 no. 150. So Luther et al.—Jos., Ant. 8, 134 ἐστρωμένος means ‘floored’ or ‘panelled’). Others prefer 2a next
    ② to equip someth. with appropriate furnishing(s)
    ⓐ to furnish ἀνάγαιον ἐστρωμένον upper room furnished w. carpets or couches for the guests to recline on as they ate (EKlostermann, ELohmeyer; Field, Notes 39; somewhat as Plut., Artox. 10 [22, 10]; Artem. 2, 57 codd. Also Diod S 21, 12, 4; IG II, 622 ἔστρωσεν refers to a couch at a meal; Dalman, Arbeit VII 185. Eng. transl. gener. prefer this sense.—PGM 1, 107 χώρημα στρῶσαι means to prepare a room for a banquet) Mk 14:15; Lk 22:12.
    ⓑ to saddle a riding animal (L-S-J-M στόρνυμι II) ἔστρωσεν τὸν ὄνον Joseph saddled his donkey.—B. 573. DELG s.v. στόρνυμι.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > στρωννύω

  • 15 ἀπό

    ἀπό, [dialect] Aeol., Thess., Arc., Cypr. [full] ἀπύ Sapph.44, cf. 78, Alc.33, Theoc.28.16,IG12(2).6.45 (Mytil.), ἀπυδόμεναι ib.9(2).594 ([place name] Larissa), 5(2).6 ([place name] Tegea), etc.:—Prep. usually with Gen. but v. infr. B. (Cf. Skt.
    A ápa, Lat. ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Goth. af, OE. af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ ᾰπο?ἀπόX: where ἀπο ¯ is found in [dialect] Ep. before v or liquids (as

    ἀπὸ ἕθεν Il.6.62

    ,

    ἀπὸ νευρῆς 11.664

    , Hes. Sc. 409) ἀπαί was sometimes written in later texts, cf. Eust. 625.11:— [pron. full] ᾱ metri gr. in [dialect] Ep. compds., such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]
    I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in Hom. the prevailing sense:
    1 of Motion, from, away from,

    ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων Il.2.208

    ; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν ib.24.492;

    ἀπ' οὐρανόθεν 8.365

     (later with Advbs.,

    ἀπὸ ἔμπροσθεν LXX Ec.1.10

    , etc.); strengthd.,

    ἐκτὸς ἀ. κλισιης Il.10.151

    ; also ἀπ' αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, ib.24.725; opp. ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion,

    λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ' ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν X.Mem.2.7.2

    ; similarly of the cause or ground,

    ἐξ ὧν προηγώνισθε καὶ ἀφ' ὧν εἰκάζω Th.4.126

    :— freq. of warriors fighting from chariots, etc.,

    οἱ μὲν ἀφ' ἵππων, οἱ δ' ἀ. νηῶν.. μάχοντο Il.15.386

    ;

    ἀφ' ἵππων μάρνασθαι Od.9.49

    ; so

    ἡ μάχη ἦν ἀφ' ἵππων Hdt.1.79

    ; λαμπὰς ἔσται ἀφ' ἵππων on horseback, Pl.R. 328a;

    ἀφ' ἵππου θηρεύειν X.An.1.2.7

    ;

    ἀ. νεῶν πεζομαχεῖν Th. 7.62

    ;

    ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν αἰρόμενος τοὺς ἱστοὺς ἀ. τούτων ἐσκοπεῖτο X.HG 6.2.29

    ; ὀμμάτων ἄπο.. κατέσταζον γένυν, of tears, E.Hec. 240: joined with

    ἐκ, ἐκ Κορίνθου ἀ. τοῦ στρατοπέδου Pl.Tht. 142a

    .
    2 of Position, away from, far from,

    μένων ἀ. ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.2.292

     (cf. ἀπ' ἀνδρὸς εἶναι to live apart from a man or husband, Plu.CG4);

    κεκρυμμένος ἀπ' ἄλλων Od.23.110

    ;

    μοῦνος ἀπ' ἄλλων h.Merc. 193

    ; ἀπ' ὀφθαλμῶν, ἀπ' οὔατος, far from sight or hearing, Il.23.53, 18.272, cf. 22.454;

    ἀ. θαλάσσης ᾠκίσθησαν Th.1.7

    , cf. 46;

    αὐλίζεσθαι ἀ. τῶν ὅπλων Id.6.64

    ;

    ἀπ' οἴκου εἶναι Id.1.99

    ; σπεύδειν ἀ. ῥυτῆρος far from, i.e. without using the rein, S.OC 900; in Hom. freq. strengthd., τῆλε ἀ..., νόσφιν ἀ..., Il.23.880, 5.322; in measurement of distances,

    ὅσον ιέ στάδια ἀ. Φυλῆς X.HG2.4.4

    , etc.; but later the numeral follows

    ἀ., πηγὰς ἔχων ἀ. μ σταδίων τῆς θαλάσσης D.S.4.56

    ;

    ἀ. σταδίων κ τῆς πόλεως Plu.Phil.4

    ; κατεστρατοπέδευσεν ἀ. ν σταδίων fifty stades away, Id.Oth.11, cf. D.Chr.17.17.
    3 of the mind, ἀ. θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.1.562;

    ἀ. δόξης 10.324

    ;

    οὐ.. ἀ. σκοποῦ οὐδ' ἀ. δόξης Od.11.344

    ;

    ἀ. τοῦ ἀνθρωπείου τρόπου Th.1.76

    ; οὐδὲν ἀ. τρόπου not without reason, Pl.R. 470b; οὐκ ἀ. σκοποῦ, καιροῦ, Id.Tht. 179c, 187e;

    οὐκ ἀ. γνώμης S. Tr. 389

    ;

    οὐκ ἀ. τοῦ πράγματος D.24.6

    ;

    μάλα πολλὸν ἀπ' ἐλπίδος ἔπλετο A.R.2.863

    .
    4 in pregnant sense, with Verbs of rest, previous motion being implied (cf. ἐκ)

    , ἀνὰ δ' ἐβόασεν.. ἀ. πέτρας σταθείς E.Tr. 523

    ; ἀ.τῆς ἐμῆς κεφαλῆς τὴν [ἐκείνου] κεφαλὴν ἀναδήσω, i. e. taking the chaplet off my head, and placing it on his, Pl.Smp. 212e: with Verbs of hanging, where ἐκ is more common,

    ἁψαμένη βρόχον ἀ. μελάθρου Od.11.278

    .
    5 with the Article, where the sense of motion often disappears, οἱ ἀ. τῶν οἰκιῶν φεύγουσιν, i.e. οἱ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις φεύγουσιν ἀπ' αὐτῶν, X.Cyr.7.5.23; οἱ ἀ. τῶν πύργων.. ἐπαρήξουσι ib.6.4.18;

    αἴρειν τὰ ἀ. τῆς γῆς Pl.Cra. 410b

    ; αἱ ἵπποι αἱ ἀ. τοῦ ἅρματος v.l. in Hdt.4.8;

    ὁ Ἀθηναῖος ὁ ἀ. τοῦ στρατεύματος X.An.7.2.19

    ;

    τὸν ἀ. γραμμᾶς κινεῖ λίθον Theoc.6.18

    .
    6 partitive, λαχὼν ἀ. ληΐδος αἶσαν part taken from the booty, a share of it, Od.5.40;

    αἴρεσθαι ἀ. τῶν καλπίδων Ar. Lys. 539

    ;

    ἀ. ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι παίδων εἷς μοῦνος Hdt.6.27

    ;

    ὀλίγοι ἀ. πολλῶν Th.7.87

    , cf. A.Pers. 1023.
    7 Math., of figures described upon a base,

    κῶνον ἀναγράφειν ἀ. κύκλου Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.19

    , etc.; τὸ ἀ. τῆς AB τετράγωνον the square on AB, Euc.1.47, cf. 48; εἴδεα ἀ. .. Archim.Spir.10,11.
    8 ἀ. ἀνθρώπου ἕως γυναικός man and woman, LXX1 Es.9.40; ἀ. ἀρσενικοῦ ἕως θηλυκοῦib.Nu.5.3.
    9 from being, instead of,

    ἀθανάταν ἀ. θνατᾶς.. ἐποίησας Βερενίκαν Theoc.15.106

    .
    10 privative, free from, without,

    ἀ. πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας PLips.16.19

     (ii A. D.);

    ἀ. ζημίας PTeb420.4

     (iii A. D.).
    II OF TIME, from, after, Hom. only in Il.8.54 ἀ. δείπνου θωρήσσοντο rising up from, i.e. after, cf. Hdt.1.133; ἀ. δείπνου εἶναι or γενέσθαι, Id.1.126, 2.78, 5.18, al.;

    ἀ. τοῦ σιτίου πίνειν Hp.Salubr.5

    ;

    ἀ. τῶν σίτων διαπονεῖσθαι X.Lac. 5.8

    ; in narrative, τὸ ἀ. τούτου or το̄δε, from this point onwards, Hdt.1.4,2.99;

    ἀ. τούτου τοῦ χρόνου Id.1.82

    , X.An.7.5.8;

    τὸ ἀπ' ἐκείνου Luc.Tox.25

    ;

    ἡμέρῃ δεκάτῃ ἀφ' ἧς.. Hdt.3.14

    , etc.;

    δευτέρῃ ἡμέρῃ ἀ. τῆς ἐμπρήσιος Id.8.55

    , cf. X.An.1.7.18, etc.;

    ἀφ' οὗ χρόνου Id.Cyr. 1.2.13

    ; more often ἀπ' or ἀφ' οὗ, Hdt.2.44, Th.1.18, etc.;

    ἀφ' οὗπερ A.Pers. 177

    ;

    ἀφ' ἧς Plu.Pel.15

    ; εὐθὺς ἀ. παλαιοῦ, ἀ. τοῦ πάνυ ἀρχαίου, of olden time, Th.1.2,2.15;

    ἀπ' ἀρχᾶς Pi.P.8.25

    , etc.;

    ἀ. γενεᾶς X. Cyr.1.2.8

    ; ἀφ' ἑσπέρας from the beginning of evening, i.e. at eventide, Th.7.29; ἀ. πρώτου ὕπνου ib.43;

    ἀ. μέσων νυκτῶν Ar.V. 218

    ; ἀπ' ἀγροῦ fresh from field-work, Ev.Marc.15.21, cf. 7.4;

    ἀ. νουμηνίας X.An.5.6.23

    ; χρονίζειν ἀ. τοῦ καιροῦ tarry beyond the time, LXX2 Ki. 20.5; ἀ. τέλους ἐννέα μηνῶν at the end of.., ib.24.8;

    γενόμενος ἀ. τῆς ἀρχῆς Plu.Caes.5

    : hence ἀ. ἀγωνοθετῶν an εχ-ἀγωνοθέτης, IG3.398;

    ἀ. λογιστῶν POxy.1103.3

     (iv A. D.); οἱ ἀ. ὑπατείας, = consulares, Hdn.7.1.9, etc.; but ἀ. τινος the freedman of.., IG5(2).50.59(Tegea, ii A. D.), cf.ib.5(1).1391 ([place name] Andania), 1473.
    III OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:
    1 of that from which one is born, οὐ γὰρ ἀ. δρυός ἐσσι οὐδ' ἀ. πέτρης not sprung from oak or rock, Od.19.163;

    γίγνονται δ' ἄρα ταί γ' ἔκ τε κρηνέων ἀ. τ' ἀλσέων 10.350

    , cf. S.OT 415, OC 571, etc.: sts. ἀπό denotes remote, and ἐκ immediate, descent,

    τοὺς μὲν ἀ. θεῶν, τοὺς δ' ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν θεῶν γεγονότας Isoc.12.81

    , cf. Hdt.7.150;

    πέμπτη ἀπ' αὐτοῦ γέννα A.Pr. 853

    ; τρίτος ἀ. Διός third in descent from Zeus, Pl.R. 391c; οἱ ἀ. γένους τινός his descendants, Plu. Them.32;

    Περσέως ἀφ' αἵματος E.Alc. 509

    : of the place one springs from,

    ἵπποι.. ποταμοῦ ἄπο Σελλήεντος Il.2.839

    . cf. 849;

    Ἡρακλεῖδαι οἱ ἀ. Σπάρτης Hdt.8.114

    , cf. Th.1.89, etc.;

    τοὺς ἀ. Φρυγίας X.Cyr.2.1.5

    , etc.:hence,
    b metaph. of things,

    Χαρίτων ἄπο κάλλος ἔχουσαι Od.6.18

    ; θεῶν ἄπο μήδεα εἰδώς ib.12;

    γάλα ἀ. βοός A.Pers. 611

    ;

    μῆνις ἀφ' ἡμῶν Id.Eu. 314

    ;

    ἡ ἀφ' ὑμῶν τιμωρία Th.1.69

    ; ὁ ἀ. τῶν πολεμίων φόβος fear inspired by the enemy, X.Cyr.3.3.53.
    c of persons, οἱ ἀ. τῆς χώρας, τῆς πόλεως, country folk, townsfolk, Plb.2.6.8, 5.70.8; and so of connexion with the founder or leader of a sect,

    οἱ ἀ. Πυθαγόρου Luc.Herm.14

    ;

    οἱ ἀ. Πλάτωνος Plu.Brut.2

    ; οἱ ἀ. τοῦ περιπάτου, ἀ. τῆς Στοᾶς, etc., Luc.Cont. 6; generally οἱ ἀ. φιλοσοφίας καὶ λόγων philosophers and learned men, ibid.; οἱ ἀ. σκηνῆς καὶ θεάτρου stage players, Plu.Sull.2;

    οἱ ἀ. τῆς βουλῆς Id.Caes.10

    , etc.; ὁ ἀφ' ἑστίας παῖς, v. ἑστία; ἀπ' ἐξωμίδος with only an ἐξωμίς, S.E.P.1.153.
    2 of the material from or of which a thing is made,

    εἵματα ἀ. ξύλου πεποιημένα Hdt.7.65

    ;

    ἀπ' ὄμφακος τεύχειν οἶνον A.Ag. 970

    , cf. S.Tr. 704;

    ὅσσα ἀ. γλυκερῶ μέλιτος Theoc.15.117

    ;

    ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου Ev.Matt.3.4

    : hence στέφανος ἀ. ταλάντων ἑξήκοντα of or weighing 60 talents, Decr. ap. D. 18.92, cf. Plb.24.1.7, IG2.555.10, al.: hence of value,

    θύεν αἶγα ἀ. δραχμᾶν εἴκοσι GDI3707

     ([place name] Cos);

    κρᾶσις ἀ. τε τῆς ἡδονῆς συγκεκραμένη καὶ ἀ. τῆς λύπης Pl.Phd. 59a

    ; so, by an extension of this use, εἰδεχθής τις ἀ. τοῦ προσώπου ugly of countenance, Thphr.Char.28.4;

    θῆλυν ἀ. χροιῆς Theoc.16.49

    ;

    σεμνὸς ἀ. τοῦ σχήματος Luc.DMort.10.8

    .
    3 of the instrument from or by which a thing is done, τοὺς.. πέφνεν ἀπ' ἀργυρέοιο βιοῖο by arrow shot from silver bow, Il.24.605;

    τόξου ἄπο κρατεροῦ ὀλέκοντα φάλαγγας 8.279

    ;

    ἐμῆς ἀπὸ χειρός 10.371

    , 11.675; so

    ἀ. χειρὸς ἐργάζεσθαι μεγάλα Luc.Hist.Conscr.29

    ; γυμνάζεσθαι ἀ. σκελῶν, χειρῶν, τραχήλου, X.Lac.5.9;

    μάχεσθαι ἀ. ἄκοντος Str.17.3.7

    ;

    ἡ ἀ. τοῦ ξίφους μάχη D.S.5.29

    ;

    βάπτειν τὸν δάκτυλον ἀ. τοῦ αἵματος LXX Le.4.7

    .
    4 of the person from whom an act comes, i.e. by whom it is done,

    οὐδὲν μέγα ἔργον ἀπ' αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο Hdt.1.14

    ;

    ζήτησιν ἀ. σφέων γενέσθαι Id.2.54

    ;

    ἐπράχθη οὐδὲν ἀπ' αὐτῶν ἔργον ἀξιόλογον Th.1.17

    , cf. 6.61;

    ἀ. τινος ὄνασθαι Pl.R. 528a

    , etc.; so τἀπ' ἐμοῦ, τἀπὸ σοῦ, E.Tr.74, S.OC 1628;

    τὰ ἀ. τῶν Ἀθηναίων Th.1.127

    ; in later Greek freq. of the direct agent, Plb.1.34.8, Str.5.4.12, D.H.9.12, Ev.Luc.9.22, J.AJ20.8.10, etc.; in codd. this may sts. be due to confusion with ὑπό, but cf. PMag.Par.1.256, BGU 1185.26(Aug.), SIG820.8(Ephesus, i A. D.), etc.
    5 of the source from which life, power, etc., are sustained,

    ζῆν ἀπ' ὕλης ἀγρίης Hdt.1.203

    ; ἀ. κτήνεων καὶ ἰχθύων ib. 216;

    ἀ. πολέμου Id.5.6

    ;

    ἀπ' ἐλαχίστων χρημάτων X.Mem.1.2.14

    ;

    ἀ. τῆς ἀγορᾶς Id.An.6.1.1

    ;

    τρέφειν τὸ ναυτικὸν ἀ. τῶν νήσων Id.HG4.8.9

    , cf. Th.1.99;

    ἀ. τῶν κοινῶν πλουτεῖν Ar.Pl. 569

    , cf. D.24.124;

    ἀ. μικρῶν εὔνους.. γεγένησαι Ar.Eq. 788

    , cf. D.18.102;

    ἀφ' ὥρας ἐργάζεσθαι

     quaestum corpore facere,

    Plu. Tim.14

    .
    6 of the cause, means, or occasion from, by, or because of which a thing is done,

    ἀ. τούτου κριοπρόσωπον τὤγαλμα τοῦ Διὸς ποιεῦσι Hdt.2.42

    ; ἀ. τινος ἐπαινεῖσθαι, θαυμάζεσθαι, ὠφελεῖσθαι, Th.2.25,6.12, X.Cyr.1.1.2;

    ἀ. τῶν ξυμφορῶν διαβάλλεσθαι Th.5.17

    ;

    τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν ἔχειν ἀ. τινος Id.1.46

    ;

    ἀ. λῃστείας τὸν βίον ἔχειν X.An. 7.7.9

    ;

    ἀπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων κρίνειν D.2.27

    ; ἀ. τοῦ πάθους in consequence of.., Th.4.30;

    βλάπτειν τινὰ ἀ. τινος Id.7.29

    ;

    κατασκευάσαντα τὸ πλοῖον ἀφ' ὧν ὑπελάμβανε σωθήσεσθαι D.18.194

    ; τρόπαιον ἀ. τινος εἱστήκει on occasion of his defeat, Id.19.320; τλήμων οὖσ' ἀπ' εὐτόλμου

    φρενός A.Ag. 1302

    , cf. 1643; ἀ. δικαιοσύνης by reason of it (v. l. for ὑπό), Hdt.7.164; ἀ. τῶν αὐτῶν λημμάτων on the same scale of profits, D.3.34, etc.; for ὅσον ἀ. βοῆς ἕνεκα, v. ἕνεκα: hence in half adverbial usages, ἀ. σπουδῆς in earnest, eagerly, Il.7.359; ἀ. τοῦἴσου, ἀ. τῆς ἴσης, or ἀπ' ἴσης, equally, Th.1.99,15, D.14.6, etc.;

    ἀπ' ὀρθῆς καὶ δικαίας τῆς ψυχῆς Id.18.298

    ;

    ἀ. ἀντιπάλου παρασκευῆς Th.1.91

    ; ἀ. τοῦ προφανοῦς openly, ib.35; ἀ. τοῦ εὐθέος straightforwardly, Id.3.43; ἀ. τοῦ αὐτομάτου of free-will, Pl.Prt. 323c; ἀ. γλώσσης by word of mouth, Hdt.1.123 (but also, from hearsay, A.Ag. 813);

    ἀ. στόματος Pl.Tht. 142d

    ; ἀπ' ὄψεως at sight, Lys.16.19; ἀ. χειρὸς λογίζεσθαι on your fingers, Ar.V. 656;

    πεύθομαι δ' ἀπ' ὀμμάτων νόστον A.Ag. 988

    ; ὀμμάτων ἄπο in the public gaze, E.Med. 216;

    ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου ἄρχοντας καθίστασθαι X.Mem.1.2.9

    ;

    ἡ βουλὴ ἡ ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου Th.8.66

    , cf. IG1.9;

    τοὺς ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου δισχιλίους ἄνδρας Arist.Ath.24.3

    ; τριηράρχους αἱρεῖσθαι ἀ. τῆς οὐσίας Decr. ap. D.18.106; ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ from oneself, on one's own account, Th.8.6, etc.;

    ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ γνώμης Id.4.68

    ; ἀ. συνθήματος, ἀ. παραγγέλματος, by agreement, by word of command, Hdt.5.74, Th.8.99; ἀ. σάλπιγγος by sound of trumpet, X.Eq.Mag.3.12 (s.v.l.); ἐπίτροπος ἀ. τῶν λόγων, = Lat. procurator a rationibus, Ann.Epigr..1913.143a (Ephesus, ii A. D.).
    7 of the object spoken of, τὰ ἀ. τῆς νήσου οἰκότα ἐστί the things told from or of the island.., Hdt.4.195, cf. 54, 7.195;

    νόμος κείμενος ἀ. τῶν τεχνῶν Ar.Ra. 762

    .
    B in Arc., Cypr., ἀπύ takes dat., ἀπὺ τᾷ [ἁμέρᾳ] IG5(2).6 ([place name] Tegea);

    ἀπὺ τᾷ ζᾷ Inscr.Cypr.135.8

     H. ([place name] Idalion).
    2 in later Greek ἀπό is found c. acc., PLond.1.124.30 (iv/v A. D.).
    C in Hom. frequent with Verbs in tmesi, as Il.5.214, etc., and sts. in Prose, as Hdt.8.89.
    1 asunder, as ἀποκόπτω, ἀπολύω, ἀποτέμνω: and hence, away, off, as ἀποβάλλω, ἀποβαίνω; denoting, remoual of an accusation, as ἀπολογέομαι, ἀποψηφίζομαι.
    2 finishing off, completing, ἀπεργάζομαι, ἀπανδρόω, ἀπανθρωπίζω, ἀπογλαυκόω.
    3 ceasing from, leaving off, as ἀπαλγέω, ἀποκηδεύω, ἀπολοφύρομαι, ἀποζέω, ἀπανθίζω, ἀφυβρίζω.
    4 back again, as ἀποδίδωμι, ἀπολαμβάνω, ἀπόπλους: also, in full, or what is one's own, as ἀπέχω, ἀπολαμβάνω: freq. it only strengthens the sense of the simple.
    5 by way of abuse, as in ἀποκαλέω.
    6 almost = ἀ- priv.; sts. with Verbs, as ἀπαυδάω, ἀπαγορεύω; more freq. with Adjectives, as ἀποχρήματος, ἀπότιμος, ἀπόσιτος, ἀπόφονος.
    E ἄπο, by anastrophe for ἀπό, when it follows its Noun, as

    ὀμμάτων ἄπο S.El. 1231

    , etc.; never in Prose.
    2 ἄπο for ἄπεστι, Semon.1.20, Timocr.9.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀπό

  • 16 καταλαμβάνω

    καταλαμβάνω (s. λαμβάνω; Hom.+) 2 aor. κατέλαβον; pf. κατείληφα. Mid.: fut. καταλήψομαι LXX; 2 aor. κατελαβόμην. Pass.: fut. 3 pl. καταλη(μ)θήσονται (PsSol 15:9); 1 aor. κατελήμφθην Phil 3:12 (B-D-F §101 p. 53 s.v. λαμβ.; Mlt-H. 246f s.v. λαμβ.; on the form κατειλήφθη J 8:4 in the older NT editions s. W-S. §12, 1); pf. 3 sg. κατείληπται, ptc. κατειλημμένος. Gener. ‘to seize, lay hold of’ (of forceful seizure Plut., Cleom. 806 [4, 2]; POxy 1101, 26; PsSol 8:19)
    ① to make someth. one’s own, win, attain, act. and pass. (Diog. L. 5, 12 καταλαμβάνω means ‘come into possession of an inheritance’); abs. (though τὸ βραβεῖον is to be supplied fr. the context) of the winning of a prize 1 Cor 9:24. As a result of διώκειν (cp. Diod S 17, 73, 3 ἐπιδιώκων … τὸν Δαρεῖον … καταλαβών; Sir 11:10 ἐὰν διώκῃς, οὐ μὴ καταλάβῃς; 27:8) Phil 3:12a, 13: Χριστόν, corresp. to κατελήμφθην ὑπὸ Χριστοῦ Ἰ. vs. 12b. δικαιοσύνην Ro 9:30. ἐπίγνωσιν πατρός Dg 10:1 cj (vGebhardt for καὶ λάβῃς). The pass. is found in the mng. make one’s own in the ending of Mark in the Freer ms. 3 (KHaacker, ZNW 63, ’72, 125–29).—This may also be the mng. of κ. in J 1:5 ἡ σκοτία αὐτὸ (=τὸ φῶς) οὐ κατέλαβεν (-λαμβάνει Tat. 13, 1; cp. Arrian., An. Alex. 1, 5, 10 εἰ νὺξ αὐτοὺς καταλήψεται ‘if the night would overtake them’; here preceded in 1, 5, 9 by k. in the sense ‘occupy’ of positions above a plain; s. Wetstein on J 1:5 and 2b below) the darkness did not grasp it (Hdb. ad loc.; so also Bultmann, and similarly JDyer, JBL 79, ’60, 70f: appreciate), in which case grasp easily passes over to the sense comprehend (the act. [for the mid. in the same sense s. 4a below] has the latter sense in Pla., Phdr. 250d; Polyb. 8, 4, 6; Dionys. Hal. 5, 46, 3; PTebt 15, 5; 38, 18; EpArist 1; Aristobul. [Eus., PE 8, 10, 10 and 17=Denis 219, 18 and 221, 5/Holladay p. 140, 2f and 148, 3]; Philo, Mut. Nom. 4; Jos., Vi. 56). Most Greek commentators since Origen take κ. here as overcome, suppress (Hdt. 1, 46 κ. τινῶν αὐξανομένην τὴν δύναμιν; 1, 87 τὸ πῦρ; WNagel, ZNW 50, ’59, 132–37). So Goodsp. put out (Probs. 93f). But perh. J intended to include both mngs. here (so FGingrich, ClW 37, ’43, 77), and some such transl. as master would suggest this (so MSmith, JBL 64, ’45, 510f).
    ② to gain control of someone through pursuit, catch up with, seize
    ⓐ of authority figures catch up with, overtake (Hdt. 1:63 τοὺς φεύγοντας; Polyb. 1:47; Gen. 31:23; Judg 18:22; PsSol 15:8) διωκόμενοι κατελήμφθησαν they were pursued and overtaken AcPl Ha 11, 18.
    ⓑ mostly of varieties of evil seize w. hostile intent, overtake, come upon (Hom.+; oft. LXX; TestSol 2:4 D; Wetstein and Zahn [comm.] on J 1:5 for other exx.; s. also SIG 434/5, 14) μὴ ἡμᾶς καταλάβῃ κακά lest evil overtake us (cp. Gen 19:19; Num 32:23) 2 Cl 10:1; cp. B 4:1. Of a hostile divinity ὅπου ἐὰν αὐτὸν καταλάβῃ wherever it seizes him (the sick man) Mk 9:18.
    ⓒ esp. used of night, evening, darkness coming upon a pers. (Dionys. Hal. 2, 51, 3 ἑσπέρα γὰρ αὐτοὺς κατέλαβεν; Lucian, Tox. 31; 52; Philo, De Jos. 145; Jos., Ant. 5, 61 καταλαβοῦσα νύξ, Vi. 329 [GrBar 9:1]. But the thought in these instances is not necessarily always that of night as something hostile to humans in general. κ. can also mean simply ‘arrive’, ‘come on’, as in numerous exx. cited by Wetstein [above]; s. also Dionys. Hal. 10, 56, 1 ἐπεὶ κατέλαβεν ὁ τ. ἀρχαιρεσιῶν καιρός; Strabo 3, 1, 5; Jos., Ant. 4, 78) GJs 14:1 κατέλαβεν (-ἐβαλεν pap) αὐτὸν νύξ; J 6:17 v.l. σκοτία. In imagery, w. sugg. of sense in 2b: 12:35.
    ③ to come upon someone, with implication of surprise, catch
    ⓐ of moral authorities catch, detect (PLille 3, 58 [III B.C.]; Just., D. 47, 5 [noncanonical dominical saying]; PRyl 138, 15. Esp. of the detection of adultery Epict. 2, 4, 1; BGU 1024 III, 11; Sus 58) τινὰ ἐπί τινι someone in someth. ἐπὶ μοιχείᾳ in adultery (Diod S 10, 20, 2 ἐπὶ μοιχείᾳ κατειλημμένη) J 8:3 a woman caught in the act of adultery. Pass. (Just., A I, 47, 6) w. ptc. indicating the punishable act ἐπʼ αὐτοφώρῳ μοιχουομένη in the act of committing adultery vs. 4.
    ⓑ of a thief: in imagery of the coming of ‘the day’, unexpected by the ‘children of darkness’ and fraught w. danger for them 1 Th 5:4.
    ④ to process information, understand, grasp
    ⓐ learn about someth. through process of inquiry, mid. grasp, find, understand (Dionys. Hal. 2, 66, 6; Sext. Emp., Math. 7, 288; Vett. Val. 225, 8; TestJob 37:6 τὰ βάθη τοῦ κυρίου al.; Philo, Mos. 1, 278; Jos., Ant. 8, 167; Tat. 4:2 [on Ro 1:20]; Ath. 5, 2; 24, 2) w. acc. and inf. Ac 25:25. W. ὅτι foll. 4:13; 10:34. W. indirect discourse foll. Eph 3:18.
    ⓑ on J 1:5 s. 1 and 2 above.—B. 701; 1207. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καταλαμβάνω

  • 17 πνεῦμα

    πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 308ff).
    ① air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)
    ⓐ wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).
    ⓑ the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).
    ② that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen2 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.2 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.
    ③ a part of human personality, spirit
    ⓐ when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X7 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.
    ⓑ as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).
    ⓒ spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.
    ④ an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).
    ⓐ God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).
    ⓑ good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.
    ⓒ evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.
    ⑤ God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.
    ⓐ the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.
    ⓑ the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.
    ⓒ Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).
    β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.
    ⓓ abs.
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).
    β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.
    ⓔ The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.
    ⓕ Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.
    ⓖ The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.
    α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.
    β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.
    γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).
    δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.
    ⑥ the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).
    ⓐ πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.
    ⓑ Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).
    ⓒ The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.
    ⓓ The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.
    ⓔ One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.
    ⓕ The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.
    ⑦ an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.
    ⑧ an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen2 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines6 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes2 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πνεῦμα

  • 18 χείρ, χειρός

    + ἡ N 3 367-628-349-370-229=1943 Gn 3,22; 4,11; 5,29; 8,9; 9,2
    hand Gn 3,22; forefoot (of anim.) Lv 11,27; arm Gn 24,22
    hand, power, control Gn 41,35; rule, dominion 2 Sm 8,3; power (of iron) Jb 5,20; hand, power (of God)
    Ezr 7,6
    signpost (monument with pointing hand) Ez 21,24
    axle tree 1 Kgs 7,18(32); space 1 Kgs 7,21; handle Ct 5,5(secundo)
    διὰ χειρὸς βασιλέως by the hand of the king, by means of the king (instr.) Ez 30,10 (semit., rendering Hebr. ביד); ἐκ χειρὸς πᾶντων τῶν θηρίων from the hand of all the animals, from all the animals Gn 9,5; ἐν χειρὶ Μωυσῆ by the hand of Moses, by Moses (instr.) Jos 21,2 (semit., rendering Hebr. ביד); ἐπὶ χεῖρα αὐτῶν next to them Neh 3,4
    κατὰ χεῖράς σου according to your will Sir 25,26; χεῖρας σιδηρᾶς iron claws (instrument of torture) 4 Mc 8,13; ἀνέστακεν αὐτῷ χεῖρα he raised a hand for him, he set up help for him 1 Sm 15,12; παραδίδωμί σε εἰς χεῖρας ὧν μισεῖς I will deliver you into the hands of those whom you hate Ez 23,28; ἐν ταῖς χερσίν σου in your hands (indicating power) Gn 16,6; οὐκ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ χειρός not in truth of hand 1 Chr 12,18; παραδώσει αὐτὸν εἰς χεῖρας πτώσεως αὐτοῦ she will give him over to his own ruin Sir 4,19; ἀνὰ χεῖρα αὐτοῦ παρῆγον they passed by him (semit., rendering MT על־ידו עברים) 2 Sm 15,18
    *Dt 2,36 εἰς τὰς χεῖρας ἡμῶν in our hands-נו( י) ביד (Sam. Pent.) for MT לפנינו before us; *Jer 2,34 ἐν ταῖς χερσίν σου on your hands-בכפיך for MT בכנפיך on your wings, on your skirts; *Jer 30,3(49,9) χεῖρα αὐτῶν their hand-ם/יד for MT ם/די their need, that which is required by them; *Jer 30,4(49,10) διὰ χεῖρα by the hand, by the arm-זרוע for MT זרעו his offspring; *Ez 21,17 ἐπὶ τὴν χεῖρά σου (clap) your hands ך/יד for MT ירך the thigh; *Hos 11,6 ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ with his hands-ידיו/ב for MT בדיו his parts?;
    *Ps 57 (58),11 τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ his hands-כפיו for MT פעמיו his feet; *Ps 73(74),3 τὰς χεῖράς σου your hands-כפיך for MT פעמיך your feet; *Jb 33,7 (οὐ)δὲ ἡ χείρ μου and my hand-וכפי for MT ואכפי and my burden
    Cf. DELCOR 1967b, 230-240; GEHMAN 1951 =1972 100; 1966=1972 105; LE BOULLUEC 1989 44.94-95.
    112-113.117-118.163-164; LUST 1994, 163; SOLLAMO 1979, 156-221; WEVERS 1993 221.291; →LSJ
    Suppl(2 Sm 8,3; 1 Chr 18,3; Ez 21,24); NIDNTT; TWNT

    Lust (λαγνεία) > χείρ, χειρός

  • 19 γνώμη

    A means of knowing: hence, mark, token, Thgn.60 (pl.); of the teeth (cf.

    γνώμων 111

    ), Arist.HA 576b15.
    II organ by which one perceives or knows, intelligence,
    1 thought, judgement (

    τῆς ψυχῆς ἡ γ. Pl.Lg. 672b

    ),

    ἐκμαθεῖν ψυχήν τε καὶ φρόνημα καὶ γ. S. Ant. 176

    : acc. abs., γνώμην ἱκανός intelligent, Hdt.3.4; γ. ἀγαθός, κακός, S.OT 687, Ph. 910;

    τοιάδε τὴν γ. Id.El. 1021

    ;

    κατὰ γ. ἴδρις Id.OT 1087

     (lyr.);

    γνώμᾳ διπλόαν θέτο βουλάν Pi.N.10.89

    ;

    γνώμῃ μαθεῖν τι S.OC 403

    ;

    γνώμῃ κυρήσας Id.OT 398

    ; γνώμῃ φρενῶν, opp. ὀργῇ, ib. 524;

    γνώμης ξύνεσις Th.1.75

    ;

    γνώμης μᾶλλον ἐφόδῳ ἢ ἰσχύος Id.3.11

    ;

    ταῖς γ. καὶ τοῖς σώμασι σφάλλεσθαι X. Cyr.1.3.10

    , cf. Th.1.70; γνώμῃ, opp.

    τύχῃ, σωφρονοῦντες Isoc.3.47

    ; γνώμης ἅπτεσθαι affect the head, of wine or fever, Hp.Acut.63, Fract.11; γνώμην ἔχειν understand, S. El. 214 (lyr.), Ar.Ach. 396;

    πάντων γ. ἴσχειν S.Ph. 837

     (lyr.); προσέχειν γνώμην give heed, attend,

    δεῦρο τὴν γ. προσίσχετε Eup.37

    ;

    πρὸς ἕτερον γνώμην ἔχειν Aeschin. 3.192

    ; to be on one's guard, Th.1.95; δηλοῦν τὴν γ. ἔν τινι to show one's wit in.., Id.3.37;

    ἐν γνώμῃ τι παραστῆσαι D.4.17

    ; ἀπὸ γνώμης φέρειν ψῆφον δικαίαν with a good conscience, A.Eu. 674; but οὐκ ἀπὸ γ. λέγεις not without judgement, with good sense, S.Tr. 389;

    ἄτερ γνώμης A.Pr. 456

    ;

    ἄνευ γ. S.OC 594

    ; γνώμῃ κολάζειν with good reason, X.An.2.6.10; γνώμῃ τῇ ἀρίστῃ (sc. κρίνειν or δικάζειν) to the best of one's judgement, in the dicasts' oath, Arist.Rh. 1375a29;

    ἡ καλουμένη γ. τοῦ ἐπιεικοῦς κρίσις ὀρθή Id.EN 1143a19

    ; so

    περὶ ὧν ἂν νόμοι μὴ ὦσι, γνώμῃ τῇ δικαιοτάτῃ κρινεῖν D.20.118

    ;

    γ. τῇ δ. δικάσειν ὀμωμόκασιν Id.23.96

    , cf. 39.40;

    τῇ δ. γ. Arist.Pol. 1287a26

    ; ὅστις γνώμῃ μὴ καθαρεύει has not a clear conscience, Ar.Ra. 355.
    2 will, disposition, inclination,

    εὐσεβεῖ γνώμᾳ Pi.O.3.41

    ;

    γ. Διός A.Pr. 1003

    ; ἐν γνώμῃ γεγονέναι τινί to stand high in his favour, Hdt.6.37; πάσῃ τῇ γ. with all one's zeal, Th.6.45;

    τίνα αὐτοὺς οἴεσθε γ. ἕξειν περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν And.1.104

    ;

    γ. ἔ. περί τινα Lys.10.21

    ; πρὸς τοὺς Ἀθηναίους τὴν γ. ἔχειν to be inclined towards.., Th.5.44; ἐμπιμπλάναι τὴν γ. τινός satisfy his wishes, X.An.1.7.8, cf. HG6.1.15 (pl.); ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ γνώμης on his own initiative, Th.4.68; ἐκ μιᾶς γ. of one accord, with one consent, D.10.59;

    μιᾷ γνώμῃ Th.1.122

    , 6.17;

    διὰ μιᾶς γ. γίγνεσθαι Isoc.4.139

    ; κατὰ γνώμην according to one's mind or wishes,

    ὅταν τἀκεῖ θῶ κατὰ γνώμην ἐμήν E.Andr. 737

    ;

    ἄν τι μὴ κατὰ γ. ἐκβῇ D.1.16

    : in pl., φίλιαι γνῶμαι friendly sentiments, Hdt. 9.4.
    III judgement, opinion,

    βροτῶν γ. Parm.8.61

    ; ταύτῃ.. τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖστός εἰμι I in cline mostly to this view, Hdt.7.220 (s. v.l.); also

    ταύτῃ πλεῖστος τὴν γνώμην εἰμί Id.1.120

    ;

    ἡ πλείστη γ. ἐστί τινι Id.5.126

    ;

    τλέον φέρει ἡ γ. τινί Id.8.100

    ;

    τὸ πλεῖστον τῆς γ. εἶχεν.. προσμεῖξαι Th.3.31

    ;

    γνώμην τίθεσθαι Hdt.3.80

    ; οὕτως τὴν γ. ἔχειν to be of this opinion, Th.7.15, cf. X.Cyr.6.2.8, Ar.Nu. 157;

    εἴ τινι γ. τοιαύτη παρειστήκει περὶ ἐμοῦ And.1.54

    ;

    τὴν αὐτὴν γ. ἔχειν Th.2.55

    ; τῆς αὐτῆς γ. εἶναι, ἔχεσθαι, Id.1.113, 140;

    ὁ αὐτὸς εἰμὶ τῇ γ. Id.3.38

    ; κατὰ γ. τὴν ἐμήν in my judgement or opinion, Hdt.2.26, 5.3; ellipt.,

    κατά γε τὴν ἐμήν Ar.Ec. 153

    , cf. Plb.18.1.18, D.H.Isoc.3: abs.,

    γνώμην ἐμήν Ar.V. 983

    , Pax 232; παρὰ γνώμην τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ἐγένετο contrary to general opinion, Th.4.40; but παρὰ γ. κινδυνευταί reckless venturers, Id.1.70, cf. 4.19; εἰπὲ μὴ παρὰ γ. ἐμοί either contrary to my wish, or contrary to your true opinion, A.Ag. 931, cf.Supp. 454: freq. of opinions delivered publicly,

    ἑστάναι πρὸς τὴν γ. τινός Th.4.56

    ; Θεμιστοκλέους γνώμῃ by the advice of Th., Id.1.90,93; γνώμην ἀποφαίνειν deliver an opinion, Hdt.1.40; ἀποδείκνυσθαι ib. 207;

    ἐκφαίνειν Id.5.36

    ;

    τίθεσθαι S.Ph. 1448

     (anap.), Ar.Ec. 658;

    ἀποφαίνεσθαι E.Supp. 336

    ;

    ποιεῖσθαι περί τινων Th.3.36

    ; γνώμας κατέθεντο have made up their minds, Parm.8.53.
    b verdict,

    ἡ τοῦ δικαστοῦ γ. IG4.364

     (Corinth, iv A. D.), cf. 685.32 (pl., Cret., ii B. C.).
    2 proposition, motion,

    γνώμην εἰσφέρειν Hdt.3.80

    ,81;

    εἰπεῖν Th.8.68

    , etc.; (but γνώμας προτιθέναι hold a debate, Th.3.36);

    γνῶμαι τρεῖς προεκέατο Hdt.3.83

    : freq. in Inscrr., resolution, IG12.118.28, etc.; γ. στρατηγῶν ib.22.27; Κλεισόφου καὶ συμπρυτάνεων ib.1; ἡ ἐκφερομένη γ. ib.1051c26; γνώμην νικᾶν carry a motion, Ar.V. 594, Nu. 432;

    κρατεῖν τῇ γ. Plu.Cor.17

    .
    3 γνῶμαι, αἱ, practical maxims, Heraclit. 78, S.Aj. 1091, X.Mem.4.2.9, Arist.Rh. 1395a11 (sg., 1394a22).
    4 in pl., fancies, illusions, S.Aj.52.
    5 intention, purpose, resolve, ἀπὸ τοιᾶσδε γνώμης with some such purpose as this, Th.3.92; γνώμην ποιεῖ σθαι, c.inf., propose to do, Id.1.128; κατὰ γνώμην of set purpose, D.H. 6.81 (so also

    γνώμης Lib.Or.33.13

    , 50.12); τίνα ἔχουσα γνώμην; with what purpose? Hdt.3.119; οἶδα δ' οὐ γνώμῃ τίνι; with what intent? S.OT 527, cf. Aj. 448; ἡ ξύμπασα γ. τῶν λεχθέντων the general purport.., Th.1.22; ἦν τοῦ τείχους ἡ γνώμη.., ἵνα .. the purpose of it was.., that.., Id.8.90.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > γνώμη

  • 20 διά

    διά, poet. [full] διαί ([dialect] Aeol. [full] ζά, q.v.), Prep. governing gen. and acc.— Rad. sense,
    A through; never anastroph. [Prop. δῐᾰ: but Hom. uses [pron. full] ῑ at the beginning of a line, Il.3.357, 4.135, al.: also ᾱ, metri gr., freq. in Hom., for which A. uses [full] διαί in lyr., Ag. 448, al.]
    A WITH GEN.
    I of Place or Space:
    1 of motion in a line, from one end to the other, right through, in Hom. freq. of the effect of weapons,

    διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε.. ἔγχος καὶ διὰ θώρηκος.. Il. 3.357

    ;

    δουρὶ βάλεν Δάμασον κυνέης διά 12.183

    ;

    δι' ὤμου.. ἔγχος ἦλθεν 4.481

    ; in Prose,

    τιτρώσκειν διὰ τοῦ θώρακος X.An.1.8.26

    ; διὰ τοῦ ὀρόφου ἐφαίνετο πῦρ ib.7.4.16: also of persons, διὰ Σκαιῶν πεδίονδ' ἔχον ὠκέας ἵππους out through the Scaean gate, Il.3.263; δι' ἠέρος αἰθέρ' ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, Il.14.288, cf. 2.458; διὰ Τρώων πέτετο straight through them, 13.755;

    δι' ὄμματος.. λείβων δάκρυον S.OC 1250

    , etc.: also in Compos. with πρό and ἐκ, v. διαπρό, διέκ: in adverbial phrases, διὰ πασῶν (sc. χορδῶν), v. διαπασῶν:

    διὰ πάσης

     throughout,

    Th.1.14

    ;

    διὰ κενῆς

     idly,

    Id.4.126

    , etc. (cf.111.1.c).
    2 of motion through a space, but not in a line, throughout, ouer,

    ἑπόμεσθα διὰ πεδίοιο Il.11.754

    ;

    δι' ὄρεσφι 10.185

    , al.; ὀδύνη διὰ χροὸς ἦλθε through all his frame, 11.398;

    τεῦχε βοὴν διὰ ἄστεος Od.10.118

    ;

    δι' ὁμίλου Il.6.226

    , etc.;

    θορύβου διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος X.An.1.8.16

    , cf. 2.4.26, etc.; later, in quoting an authority,

    ἱστορεῖ δ. τῆς δευτέρας

     in the course of..,

    Ath.10.438b

    .
    3 in the midst of, Il.9.468;

    κεῖτο τανυσσάμενος δ. μήλων Od.9.298

    ; between,

    δ. τῶν πλευρέων ταμόντα Hp.Morb.2.61

    : hence, of pre-eminence,

    ἔπρεπε καὶ δ. πάντων Il.12.104

    ;

    τετίμακε δι' ἀνθρώπων Pi.I.4(3).37

    ;

    εὐδοκιμέοντι δ. πάντων Hdt.6.63

    , cf. 1.25, etc.
    4 in Prose, sts. of extension, along,

    παρήκει δ. τῆσδε τῆς θαλάσσης ἡ ἀκτή Id.4.39

     (but πέταται δ. θαλάσσας across the sea, Pi.N.6.48);

    λόφος, δι' οὗ τὸ σταύρωμα περιεβέβληντο X.HG7.4.22

    .
    5 in Prose, of Intervals of Space, δ. τριήκοντα δόμων at intervals of thirty layers, i. e. after every thirtieth layer, Hdt.1.179; δ. δέκα ἐπάλξεων at every tenth battlement, Th.3.21; cf. infr. 11.3: of a single interval, δ. πέντε σταδίων at a distance of five stades, Hdt.7.30, cf. 198; δ. τοσούτου μᾶλλον ἢ δ. πολλῶν ἡμερῶν ὁδοῦ at so short a distance, etc., Th.2.29; δ. πολλοῦ at a great distance apart, Id.3.94;

    δ. πλείστου Id.2.97

    ;

    δι' ἐλάσσονος Id.3.51

    ;

    ὕδατα δ. μακροῦ ἀλόμενα Hp.

    Aër.9, etc.
    II of Time,
    1 of duration from one end of a period to the other, throughout, δ. παντὸς [τοῦ χρόνου] Hdt.9.13;

    δι' ὅλου τοῦ αἰῶνος Th.1.70

    ;

    δι' αἰῶνος S.El. 1024

    ;

    δι' ἡμέρας ὅλης Ar. Pax 27

    ;

    δι' ὅλης τῆς νυκτός X.An.4.2.4

    , etc.: without an Adj., δι' ἡμέρης all day long, Hdt.1.97;

    δ. νυκτός Th.2.4

    , X.An.4.6.22 (but δ. νυκτός in the course of the night, by night, Act.Ap.5.19, PRyl.138.15 (i A. D.), etc.);

    δ. νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας Pl.R. 343b

    ; δι' ἐνιαυτοῦ, δι' ἔτους, Ar.Fr.569.8, V. 1058;

    δ. βίου Pl.Smp. 183e

    , etc.;

    δ. τέλους

     from beginning to end,

    A.Pr. 275

    , Pl.R. 519c, etc.: with Adjs. alone,

    δ. παντός

     continually,

    A.Ch. 862

     (lyr.), etc.; δι' ὀλίγου for a short time, Th.1.77;

    δ. μακροῦ E.Hec. 320

    ;

    ὁ δ. μέσου χρόνος Hdt. 8.27

    .
    2 of the interval which has passed between two points of Time, δ. χρόνου πολλοῦ or δ. πολλοῦ χρ. after a long time, Id.3.27, Ar.Pl. 1045;

    δ. μακρῶν χρόνων Pl.Ti. 22d

    : without an Adj., δ. χρόνου after a time, S.Ph. 758, X.Cyr.1.4.28, etc.; δι' ἡμερῶν after several days, Ev.Marc.2.1; and with Adjs. alone,

    δι' ὀλίγου Th.5.14

    ;

    οὐ δ. μακροῦ Id.6.15

    ,91;

    δ. πολλοῦ Luc.Nigr.2

    , etc.: with Numerals,

    δι' ἐτέων εἴκοσι Hdt.6.118

    , cf. OGI56.38 (iii B. C.), etc.: but δ. τῆς ἑβδόμης till the seventh day, Luc.Hist.Conscr.21: also distributively, χρόνος δ. χρόνου προὔβαινε time after time, S.Ph. 285;

    ἄλλος δι' ἄλλου E.Andr. 1248

    .
    3 of successive Intervals, δ. τρίτης ἡμέρης every other day, Hdt.2.37; δ. τρίτου ἔτεος ib.4, etc.; δ. πεντετηρίδος every four years (with inclusive reckoning), Id.3.97; δι' ἔτους πέμπτου, of the Olympic games, Ar.Pl. 584 (but δι' ἑνδεκάτου ἔτεος in the course of the eleventh year, Hdt.1.62).
    III causal, through, by,
    a of the Agent, δι' ἀλλέλων or -ου ἐπικηρυκεύεσθαι, ποιεῖσθαι, by the mouth of.., Id.1.69,6.4, cf. 1.113;

    δι' ἑρμηνέως λέγειν X.An.2.3.17

    , etc.;

    τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Κυρίου δ. τοῦ προφήτου Ev.Matt.1.22

    ;

    δι' ἑκόντων ἀλλ' οὐ δ. βίας ποιεῖσθαι Pl.Phlb. 58b

    ; πεσόντ' ἀλλοτρίας διαὶ γυναικός by her doing, A.Ag. 448 (lyr.);

    ἐκ θεῶν γεγονὼς δ. βασιλέων πεφυκώς X.Cyr.7.2.24

    ; δι' ἑαυτοῦ ποιεῖν τι of oneself, not by another's agency, ib.1.1.4, etc.; but also, by oneself alone, unassisted, D.15.14, cf. 22.38.
    b of the Instrument or Means, δ. χειρῶν by hand (prop. by holding between the hands),

    δι' ὁσίων χ. θιγών S. OC 470

    ; also δ. χερῶν λαβεῖν, δ. χειρὸς ἔχειν in the hand, Id.Ant. 916, 1258 (but τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων δ. χειρὸς ἔχειν to keep a firm hand on, Th.2.13);

    δ. στέρνων ἔχειν S.Ant. 639

    ;

    ἡ ἀκούουσα πηγὴ δι' ὤτων Id.OT 1387

    ;

    δ. στόματος ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.4.25

    ;

    δ. μνήμης ἔχειν Luc.Cat.9

    ;

    αἱ δ. τοῦ σώματος ἡδοναί X.Mem.1.5.6

    ; δ. λόγων συγγίγνεσθαι to hold intercourse by word, Pl.Plt. 272b;

    δ. λόγου ἀπαγγέλλειν Act.Ap.15.27

    ;

    δι' ἐπιστολῶν 2 Ep.Cor.10.9

    , POxy. 1070.15 (iii A. D.).
    c of Manner (where διά with its Noun freq. serves as an Adv.),

    δ. μέθης ποιήσασθαι τὴν συνουσίαν Pl.Smp. 176e

    ; παίω δι' ὀργῆς through passion, in passion, S.OT 807; δ. τάχους, = ταχέως, Id.Aj. 822, Th.1.63 (but δ. ταχέων ib.80, al.); δ. σπουδῆς in haste, hastily, E.Ba. 212; δι' αἰδοῦς with reverence, respectfully, ib. 441; δ. ψευδῶν ἔπη lying words, Id.Hel. 309; αἱ δ. καρτερίας ἐπιμέλειαι long-continued exertions, X.Mem.2.1.20; δι' ἀκριβείας, δ. πάσης ἀκρ., Pl.Ti. 23d, Lg. 876c;

    δ. σιγῆς Id.Grg. 450c

    ;

    δ. ξυμφορῶν ἡ ξύμβασις ἐγένετο Th.6.10

    ;

    οὐ δι' αἰνιγμάτων, ἀλλ' ἐναργῶς γέγραπται Aeschin.3.121

    ;

    δι' αἵματος, οὐ δ. μέλανος τοὺς νόμους ὁ Δράκων ἔγραψεν Plu.Sol.17

    : also with Adjs., δ. βραχέων, δ. μακρῶν τοὺς λόγους ποιεῖσθαι, Isoc.14.3, Pl.Grg. 449b; ἀποκρίνεσθαι δ. βραχυτάτων ibid. d; cf. infr. IV.
    2 in later Prose, of Material out of which a thing is made,

    κατασκευάζειν εἴδωλα δι' ἐλέφαντος καὶ χρυσοῦ D.S.17.115

    ;

    θυσίαι δι' ἀλφίτου καὶ σπονδῆς πεποιημέναι Plu.Num.8

    ;

    βρώματα δ. μέλιτος καὶ γάλακτος γιγνόμενα Ath.14.646e

    ;

    οἶνος δ. βουνίου Dsc. 5.46

    .
    IV διά τινος ἔχειν, εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, to express conditions or states, ἀγὼν διὰ πάσης ἀγωνίης ἔχων extending through every kind of contest, Hdt.2.91;

    δι' ἡσυχίης εἶναι Id.1.206

    ; δι' ὄχλου εἶναι to be troublesome, Ar.Ec. 888;

    δ. φόβου εἶναι Th.6.59

    ;

    δι' ἀπεχθείας γίγνεσθαι X.Hier.9.2

    ; ἡ ἐπιμέλεια δ. χάριτος γίγνεται ibid.;

    δ. μιᾶς γνώμης γίγνεσθαι Isoc.4.138

    .
    b with Verbs of motion, δ. μάχης ἐλεύσονται will engage in battle, Hdt.6.9;

    ἐλθεῖν Th.4.92

    ; δ. παντὸς πολέμου, δ. φιλίας ἰέναι τινί, X.An.3.2.8; δ. δίκης ἰέναι τινί go to law with.., S.Ant. 742, cf. Th.6.60;

    δ. τύχης ἰέναι S.OT 773

    ;

    δι' ὀργῆς ἥκειν Id.OC 905

    ; ἐμαυτῷ δ. λόγων ἀφικόμην I held converse with myself, E.Med. 872; δ. λόγων, δ. γλώσσης ἰέναι come to open speech, Id.Tr. 916, Supp. 112; δ. φιλημάτων ἰέναι come to kissing, Id.Andr. 416;

    δ. δικαιοσύνης ἰέναι καὶ σωφροσύνης Pl.Prt. 323a

    , etc.; δ. πυρὸς ἰέναι (v. πῦρ): in pass. sense, δι' ἀπεχθείας ἐλθεῖν τινι to be hated by.., A.Pr. 121 (anap.).
    c with trans. Verbs, δι' αἰτίας ἔχειν or ἄγειν τινά hold in fault, Th.2.60, Ael.VH9.32;

    δι' ὀργῆς ἔχειν τινά Th.2.37

    , etc.;

    δ. φυλακῆς ἔχειν τι Id.7.8

    ; δι' οἴκτου ἔχειν τινά, δι' αἰσχύνης ἔχειν τι, E.Hec. 851, IT 683;

    δ. πένθους τὸ γῆρας διάγειν X.Cyr.4.6.6

    ;

    δι' οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαί τι S.OC 584

    .
    B WITH Acc.
    I of Place, only Poet., in same sense as διά c. gen.:
    1 through,

    ἓξ δὲ δ. πτύχας ἦλθε.. χαλκός Il.7.247

    ;

    ἤϊξε δ. δρυμὰ.. καὶ ὕλην 11.118

    , cf. 23.122, etc.; δ. τάφρον ἐλαύνειν across it, 12.62;

    δ. δώματα ποιπνύοντα 1.600

    ;

    ἐπὶ χθόνα καὶ δ. πόντον βέβακεν Pi.I.4(3).41

    ;

    φεύγειν δ. κῦμ' ἅλιον A.Supp.14

     (anap.).
    2 through, among, in,

    οἴκεον δι' ἄκριας Od.9.400

    ;

    ἄραβος δὲ δ. στόμα γίγνετ' ὀδόντων Il.10.375

     (but μῦθον, ὃν.. δ. στόμα.. ἄγοιτο through his mouth, 14.91; so

    δ. στόμα ὄσσαν ἱεῖσαι Hes.Th.65

    ;

    ἀεὶ γὰρ ἡ γυνή σ' ἔχει δ. στόμα Ar.Lys. 855

    );

    δ. κρατερὰς ὑσμίνας Hes.Th. 631

    ;

    νόμοι δι' αἰθέρα τεκνωθέντες S.OT 867

     (lyr.).
    II of Time, also Poet.,

    δ. νύκτα Il.2.57

    , etc.; δ. γλυκὺν ὕπνον during sweet sleep, Mosch.4.91.
    III causal:
    1 of persons, thanks to, by aid of,

    νικῆσαι δ... Ἀθήνην Od.8.520

    , cf. 13.121;

    δ. δμῳὰς.. εἷλον 19.154

    ; δ. σε by thy fault or service, S.OC 1129, Ar.Pl. 145, cf. 160, 170: in Prose, by reason of, on account of,

    δ' ἡμᾶς Th.1.41

    , cf. X.An.7.6.33, D.18.249;

    οὐ δι' ἐμαυτόν And.1.144

    ; so εἰ μὴ διά τινα if it had not been for..,

    εἰ μὴ δι' ἄνδρας ἀγαθούς Lys.12.60

    ;

    Μιλτιάδην εἰς τὸ βάραθρον ἐμβαλεῖν ἐψηφίσαντο, καὶ εἰ μὴ δ. τὸν πρύτανιν ἐνέπεσεν ἄν Pl.Grg. 516e

    , cf. D.19.74;

    εἰ μὴ δ. τὴν ἐκείνου μέλλησιν Th.2.18

    , cf. Ar.V. 558;

    πλέον' ἔλπομαι λόγον Ὀδυσσέος ἢ πάθαν γενέσθαι δι' Ὅμηρον Pi.N.7.21

    .
    2 of things, to express the Cause, Occasion, or Purpose, δι' ἐμὴν ἰότητα because of my will, Il.15.41;

    Διὸς μεγάλου δ. βουλάς Od.8.82

    ; δι' ἀφραδίας for, through want of thought, 19.523;

    δι' ἀτασθαλίας 23.67

    ; δι' ἔνδειαν by reason of poverty, X. An.7.8.6; δ. καῦμα, δ. χειμῶνα, ib.1.7.6;

    δι' ἄγνοιαν καὶ ἀμαθίαν Pl. Prt. 360b

    , etc.: freq. also with neut. Adjs., δ. τί; wherefore?; δ. τοῦτο, δ. ταῦτα on this account; δι' ὅ, δι' ἅ on which account; δ. πολλά for many reasons, etc.
    3 = ἕνεκα, to express Purpose, δἰ ἀχθηδόνα for the sake of vexing, Th.4.40, cf. 5.53; δ. τὴν τούτου σαφήνειαν with a view to clearing this up, Pl.R. 524c, cf. Arist.EN 1172b21; αὐτή δι' αὑτήν for its own sake, Pl.R. 367b, etc.
    C WITHOUT CASE as Adv. throughout, δ. πρό (v. supr. A.I.I);

    δ. δ' ἀμπερές Il.11.377

    .
    I through, right through, of Space, διαβαίνω, διέχω, διιππεύω.
    II in different directions, as in διαπέμπω, διαφορέω; of separation, asunder, διαιρέω, διαλύω; of difference or disagreement, at variance, διαφωνέω, διαφέρω; or simply mutual relation, one with another, διαγωνίζομαι, διάδω, διαθέω, διαπίνω, διαφιλοτιμέομαι.
    III pre-eminence, διαπρέπω, διαφέρω.
    IV completion, to the end, utterly, διεργάζομαι, διαμάχομαι, διαπράττω, διαφθείρω: of Time, διαβιόω.
    V to add strength, thoroughly, out and out, διαγαληνίζω, etc.; cf. ζά.
    VI of mixture, between, partly, esp. in Adj., as διάλευκος, διάχρυσος, διάχλωρος, etc.
    VII of leaving an interval or breach, διαλείπω, διαναπαύω. (Cogn. with δύο, δίς.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > διά

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • own — own1 [ əun ] function word *** Own can be used in the following ways: as an adjective (after a possessive word and followed by a noun): We grow our own vegetables. It s the president s own fault. as a pronoun (after a possessive word but without… …   Usage of the words and phrases in modern English

  • own */*/*/ — I UK [əʊn] / US [oʊn] adjective, pronoun Summary: Own can be used in the following ways: as an adjective (after a possessive word and followed by a noun): We grow our own vegetables. ♦ It s the president s own fault. as a pronoun (after a… …   English dictionary

  • means of production — The means that are used to produce goods and services, including the social relations between workers, technology, and other resources used. The term is prominent in Marxist theory, since Marx s characterization of capitalism hinges on the… …   Dictionary of sociology

  • own — {{Roman}}I.{{/Roman}} verb ADVERB ▪ independently ▪ formerly, once, originally, previously ▪ The car was once owned by Elvis Presley. ▪ leg …   Collocations dictionary

  • To Each His Own — means that every person is entitled to his or her personal preferences and tastes, and it can also refer to:* To Each His Own, a 1946 movie. ** To Each His Own, the title song from that movie. * To Each His Own, a novel by Leonardo Sciascia. * To …   Wikipedia

  • stood on his own legs — endured by his own means, supported himself …   English contemporary dictionary

  • Russell Means — in 1987. Born Russell Charles Means November 10, 1939 (1939 11 10) (age 72) Wanblee, South Dakota …   Wikipedia

  • Gaston Means — Gaston Bullock Means (1879, Concord, North Carolina – 1938, Leavenworth, Kansas) was an American private detective, bootlegger, and con artist. While not involved in the Teapot Dome scandal, Means was associated with other members of the so… …   Wikipedia

  • Jimmy Means — Infobox NASCAR driver Name = James Smut Means Birthdate = birth date and age|1950|5|29 Birthplace = flagicon|USA Huntsville, Alabama Best Cup Pos = 11th 1982 (Winston Cup) Cup Top Tens = 17 First Cup Race = 1976 Daytona 500 (Daytona) Last Cup… …   Wikipedia

  • Eating one's own dog food — To say that a company eats its own dog food means that it uses the products that it makes. For example, Microsoft emphasizes the use of its own software products inside the company. Dogfooding is a means of conveying the company s confidence in… …   Wikipedia

  • On the Tendency of Species to form Varieties; and on the Perpetuation of Varieties and Species by Natural Means of Selection — is the title of a joint presentation of two scientific papers to the Linnean Society of London on 1 July 1858; On The Tendency of Varieties to Depart Indefinitely from the Original Type by Alfred Russel Wallace and an Extract from an unpublished… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»